Sei sulla pagina 1di 452

BPI - I Student Book

Business Process Integration - I


Student Books

rgThe Rushmore Group, LLC


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Process
Integration I

Presented by
The Rushmore Group, LLC

Welcome

• Introductions
– Student
– Instructor
• Course schedule
• Classroom materials
• Housekeeping issues

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 2

Introductions

• Your name…
• My background [briefly]…
• Your SAP role/experience/courses
attended…
• Your objectives/expectations with respect to
this course...

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 3

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 1


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Course Materials

• Business Process Integration Slides


• Business Process Integration Exercises

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 4

Schedule of Exercises

Day One – 1 to 20
Day Two – 21 to 68
Day Three – 69 to 106
Day Four – 107 to 151
Day Five – 152 to 190

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 5

An Introduction to the
Basics of SAP’s R/3
Client / Server
Integrated Business
Solution

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 2


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP

• Systems, Applications, and Products in Data


Processing (SAP)
• Name of the company
– SAP AG
– SAP America
• Name of the software
– SAP R/2 – Mainframe version
– SAP R/3 – Client/Server version

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 7

SAP AG

• Founded in Germany (1972)


• World’s third largest software provider
• World’s largest provider of Integrated Business
Solutions software
• Company stock trades on the Frankfurt and New
York exchanges

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 8

SAP R/3

• World-wide usage
• Designed to satisfy the information needs for
business sizes (small local to large all
international)
– Multi-lingual
– Multi-currency
• Designed to satisfy the information needs for all
industries (industry solutions)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 9

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 3


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3

• Enables a company to link it’s business processes


• Ties together disparate business functions
(integrated business solution)
• Helps the organization run smoothly
• Real-time environment
• Scalable and flexible

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 10

Integrated Business Solutions


Software Vendors

• SAP
• Oracle (Peoplesoft and J.D. Edwards)
• Microsoft – Great Plains, Axapta, Solomon
• IBM
• BAAN

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 11

Architecture

• Central relational database (e.g., Oracle,


Informix, Microsoft SQL and many others)
• Client/Server – three-tiered
• ERP Component – Oriented towards common
identifiable business modules
– (FI, MM, SD, CO, PP, HR)
• Add-ons:
– Customer Relationship Mgmt (CRM)
– Supply Chain Mgmt (SCM)
– Product Lifecycle Mgmt (PLM)
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 12

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 4


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Relational Database

• Tables: Defines and links thousands of tables of


information (25,000+)
• Advantages
– Consistent and accurate data
– Common definitions for terms
– Shared, but restricted usage (e.g., profiles)
– Eliminates data redundancy

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 13

Client/Server Environment

• Client
– Software/hardware combination that can make a
request for services from a central repository of
resources
• Server
– Software/hardware combination that can provide
services to a group of clients in a controlled
environment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 14

Three-Tier SAP Structure

• GUI – Graphical User Interface or Web


Interface
• Application server (one or many)
• Database server (one single location)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 15

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 5


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP Enterprise System

PCs, Laptops, etc.


Browser Client

Network

Web Server
Internet
Presentation Transaction
Server

Application Application
Servers

Database
Database

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 16

mySAP Business Suite

mySAP PLM

mySAP mySAP mySAP


SRM ERP CRM

mySAP SCM

SAP NetWeaver

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 17

mySAP ERP Modules

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP
Production
SM Planning
Mgmt.
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 18

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 6


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Modules

• Collections of logically related transactions


within identifiable business functions
– MM (“Buy”)
– PP (“Make”)
– SD (“Sell”)
– FI and CO (“Track”)
– HR

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 19

SAP R/3 Basics

• Instance – each install of the SAP R/3 software


on an individual application server

• Configurable – each instance can be


distinctively configured to fit the needs and
desires of the customer (within limits)

• Most of the infrastructure decisions, including


configuration decisions, occur during project
implementation

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 20

Configuration

• The process of tailoring SAP software by


selecting specific functionality from a list of those
supported by the software, very much like
setting defaults (e.g., Word, Access)

• DOES NOT involve changes to the underlying


software code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 21

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 7


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Programming Code Modifications

• Changes to the delivered code

• ABAP/4 – Advanced Business Application


Programming (ABAP)

• This should be done sparingly and carefully as it


can make migration to new versions of the
software much more difficult

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 22

SAP R/3 Document Principle

• Each business transaction that writes data to the


database creates a uniquely numbered
electronic document
• Each document contains information such as
– Responsible person
– Date and time of the transaction
– Commercial content
• Once created, a document can not be deleted
from the database

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 23

Review

• SAP and SAP R/3


• Integrated Business Solution
• Architecture
• Client/Server Software
• Relational Database
• SAP R/3 Modules
• Configurable Software
• Programming Code Modifications – Be Careful!!
• SAP R/3 Document Principle

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 24

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 8


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 1Unit 1
Business Processes,
Integration, and
Configuration in the
SAP R/3 Environment

Two Differing Learning Approaches

• Standard SAP training


– Level 1: Introductory
– Level 2: Business processes
– Level 3: Configuration
• Our Approach
– Cross functional
– Understand business processes and their
relationships to SAP's organizational structure
– Highlight integration/configuration!!

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 26

Learning by Creating a Model


Business

• Understanding business processes and their


integrative nature
• Understanding SAP organizational structures
• Combining business processes and SAP
organizational structure (i.e., configuration)
• Test the newly configured system
• View system outputs - statistics, reports, and
graphics

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 27

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 9


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Pen Incorporated

• Start-up company in the promotional pen


business
• Initially buys and re-sells different lines of
promotion pens
• Sells to both wholesale and retail – procure and
distribute
• Later acquires a production facility to
manufacture its own product – produce and
distribute

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 28

SAP R/3 and


Business Processes

- Overview -

Pen Incorporated
Procure for Sales Order

Pre-Sales Sales Order Accounts


Delivery Billing
Activity Receivable

Availability Goods to
Check Delivery

In Plant or Inventory General


Inventory Warehouse Postings Ledger
YES Accounts

NO Goods from
Purchase Order

Purchase Purchase Goods Invoice Accounts


Requisition Order Receipt Receipt Payable

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 30

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 10


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Pen Incorporated
Produce for Sales Order

Pre-Sales Sales Accounts


Delivery Billing
Activity Order Receivable

Availability Goods Issued


Check to Delivery

In Plant or Inventory General


Inventory Warehouse Postings Ledger
YES Accounts
Issue Goods
NO to Production Goods from
Order Production Order

Planned Production Completion Confirmation Accounts


Order Order Payable

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 31

SAP Enterprise System

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 32

Logistics

• Materials Management (MM)


• Sales and Distribution (SD)
• Production Planning (PP)
• Quality Management (QM)
• Plant Maintenance (PM)
• Service Management (SM)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 33

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 11


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Accounting and Finance

• Financial Accounting (FI)


• Controlling (CO)
• Enterprise Controlling (EC)
• Fixed Asset Management (AM)
• Project Systems (PS)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 34

Human Resources

• Human Resources (HR)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 35

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP
Production
SM Planning
Mgmt.
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 36

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 12


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Components of Materials Management

Foreign
Valuation Trade/
Customs
Logistics
Service
Invoice
Master
Verification
Materials
Product
Management Purchasing MRP
Catalog
(MM) Material
Service
Entry
Master
Sheet
Inventory Physical
Mgmt. Inventory

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 37

Integration
Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
Vendor

Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 38

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP
Production
SM Planning
Mgmt.
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 39

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 13


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Components of Sales and Distribution

Shipping
Transport
Sales
Sales
Information
Support
Sales and System
Master
Distribution Data
Billing
(SD) Foreign
Sales
Trade
Credit
Mgmt.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 40

Integration
Sales Order Process
(Order-to-Cash)

Sales Order Check


Entry Availability

Pick
Materials

Receipt of Pack
Customer Payment Materials

Invoice
Customer Post Goods
Issue
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 41

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling

SM
PP
Production
Planning
Mgmt.
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 42

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 14


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Components of Financial Accounting

Accounts
Receivable

Financial General Fixed


Accounting Ledger Assets

(FI) Accounts
Banks
Payable
Special
Purpose
Ledger

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 43

Integration
Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
Vendor

Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 44

Integration
Sales Order Process
(Order-to-Cash)

Sales Order Check


Entry Availability

Pick
Materials

Receipt of Pack
Customer Payment Materials

Invoice
Customer Post Goods
Issue
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 45

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 15


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 Configuration

- Overview -

SAP Enterprise System

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 47

Business Process Integration

• “The Stool”
– Components
• Organizational Data
• Master Data
• Rules
• Transactions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 48

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 16


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Process Integration

FI MM SD

Master
Org Data

Rules

Data
FI FI
FI
MM MM
MM
SD SD
SD
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 49

Organizational Data

• A hierarchy in which the organizational units in


an enterprise are arranged according to tasks
and functions
• Are static data and are rarely changed
• The definition of organization units is a
fundamental step, it is a critical factor in how the
company will be structured

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 50

Master Data

• Master data is relatively fixed


– Material master data
– Vendor master data
– Purchasing information record
– General Ledger master data
• Before making the master data configurations,
you must have completely defined the
organizational structures

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 51

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 17


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 52

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 53

Functional Areas – Where and When

• Business Process Integration I


– Financial Accounting (FI)
– Materials Management (MM)
– Sales and Distribution (SD)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 54

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 18


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Functional Areas – Where and When

• Business Process Integration II


– Financial Accounting (FI)
– Controlling (CO)
– Materials Management (MM)
– Production Planning (PP)
– Quality Management (QM)
– Sales and Distribution (SD)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 55

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 56

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 57

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 19


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 2

The Basics

- Navigation -

Overview

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 59

SAP R/3 System Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 60

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 20


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Logging On - SAP R/3 Initial Screens

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 61

Logging On - The Client

• This is a numeric field


• This number defines a
whole business entity

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 62

Logging On - User

• Enter the name of


the SAP user
• Users of SAP system
are client-specific
– User identification on
one client will only allow
access to that client on
that server

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 63

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 21


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Logging On - Password Rules

• Letters
• Numbers
• Easy to remember
• 3-8 Characters long
• No 3 Characters can
be the same
• Do not start with a ?
or an !
• Do not use previous
5 passwords
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 64

Logging On - Language

• SAP supports multi-


national character sets
and languages on the
same system, at the
same time
• Default languages are
English and German

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 65

Logging On - Data Record

Table
Valid Valid
Client User Password From To
400 STEVE ******** 1/1/2000 12/21/2000
400 BOB ******** 1/1/2000 12/21/2000
400 JERRY ******** 1/1/2000 12/21/2000
410 STEVE ******** 1/1/2005 12/31/2008
410 BOB ******** 1/1/2005 12/31/2008
410 JERRY ******** 1/1/2005 12/31/2008

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 66

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 22


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging On
• SAP R/3 Screens
• Basics of Data Entry
• Working with Multiple Sessions
• Reporting
• On-line Help and System Messages
• Setting User Defaults
• Logging Off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 67

SAP R/3 Screens - The Topics

• Easy Access desktop


• System menus
• System navigation
• Transaction name
• Transaction icons
• Transaction work area
• Status messages

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 68

SAP R/3 Screens - Easy Access Desktop

System Menus

System Transaction
Navigation Name

Transaction
Icons

Transaction
Work Area

Status Messages
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 69

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 23


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 Screens - Easy Access Desktop

Favorites

Folder and
Sub-Folder

Transactions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 70

SAP R/3 Screens - System Menus

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 71

SAP R/3 Screens - System Navigation


Enter

el

n
ut
Exit

on
ns
Save
Back

Print

ons
ield

icons

sessio
Canc

hortc

Optio
ic
and F

ic

Help
ktop s
Scroll
xpand

a new
Comm

a des
Find/E

Create
Create

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 72

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 24


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 Screens - Transaction Name

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 73

SAP R/3 Screens - Transaction Name

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 74

SAP R/3 Screens - Transaction Icons

• Screen or view dependant


– (e.g. materials master will differ from sales order
entry will differ from the main menu)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 75

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 25


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 Screens –


Transaction Work Area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 76

SAP R/3 Screens –


Status Messages

System Message

System Information

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 77

SAP R/3 Transaction Screen

Tabs
Header

Line Item
Detail

Line Item

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 78

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 26


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 Master Data Screen

Tabs

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 79

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 80

Basics of Data Entry

• Using menus
• Using transaction codes
• System > status
• Using /n
• Multiple sessions
• Using /o

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 81

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 27


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Basics of Data Entry

• Types of entry fields


• Moving between fields
• Radio buttons and check boxes
• Possible entry fields
• Match-codes
• Saving data
• Canceling data

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 82

Basics of Data Entry

Cancel
Save

Tab Entry (Input) Field

Check Box

Pull Down

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 83

Basics of Data Entry

• There are three types of entry fields:


– Required
– Default entry
– Optional entry field

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 84

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 28


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 85

Working with Multiple Sessions

Opens another session

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 86

Working with Multiple Sessions

• An SAP session is
a window in which
the user may
perform a particular
task
• Users may have up
to six sessions
open at one time

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 87

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 29


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 88

Reporting

• Three basic steps to running a report


– Access the report
– Enter selection criteria
– Execute the report

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 89

Reporting

Access Selection

Execution

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 90

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 30


ECC 6.0 January 2008

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 91

On-line Help

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 92

On-line Help

• Help on screen fields - F1


– Extended help
– Reference information
– Technical information
• Displaying possible entries - F4
• Using the Help menu
– Extended help
– R/3 library
– Getting started

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 93

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 31


ECC 6.0 January 2008

On-line Help

F1 - Key

F4 - Key
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 94

System Messages

• E = Error
– An invalid entry has been made
– The cursor moves to the field where the
error has occurred
• W = Warning
– A possible error has been made
– The user can continue without changing
• I = Information
– Feedback from the system

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 95

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 96

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 32


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Setting User Defaults

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 97

SAP R/3 System - Standard Features

• Logging on
• SAP R/3 screens
• Basics of data entry
• Working with multiple sessions
• Reporting
• On-line help and system messages
• Setting user defaults
• Logging off

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 98

Logging Off

• System > logoff


• Exit button
• Control box

For security purposes it is important to log off SAP


whenever you leave your PC. Your user name is
linked with all transactions you perform providing an
audit trail.
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 99

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 33


ECC 6.0 January 2008

BPI – I - Exercise Purchase Purchase


Requisition
Roadmap Order

Check Run MRP


Availability
Goods
Receipt
Procurement
Process

Sales Order
Entry Invoice
Pick
Receipt
Sales Order Materials
Process
Payment
to Vendor
Receipt of
Payment

Post Goods
Invoice Issue
January 2008 Customer © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 100

Sales Process Exercise


Part 1

Order-to-Cash

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP
Production
SM Planning
Mgmt.
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 102

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 34


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales Order Process


(Order-to-Cash)

Sales Order Check


Entry Availability

Pick
Materials

Receipt of Pack
Customer Payment Materials

Invoice
Customer Post Goods
Issue
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 103

Unit 2, Group 1 Exercises

1. Logging on the SAP System


2. Create Vendor Master
3. Create Material Master
4. Create Customer Master
5. Create Customer Quotation
6. Create Sales Order with Reference to Customer
Quotation
7. Check Stock Status

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 104

Procurement Process
Exercise

Procure-To-Pay

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 35


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 106

Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
3-Way Vendor
Match
Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 107

Unit 2, Group 2 Exercises

8. Run Materials Requirement Planning


–Single Item, Single Level
9. Convert Purchase Requisition to
Purchase Order
10. Create Goods Receipt
11. Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor
12. Post Payment to Vendor

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 108

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 36


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales Process Exercise


Part 2

Order-to-Cash

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 110

Sales Order Process


(Order-to-Cash)

Sales Order Check


Entry Availability

Pick
Materials

Receipt of Pack
Customer Payment Materials

Invoice
Customer Post Goods
Issue
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 111

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 37


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 2, Group 3 Exercises

13. Create Delivery Note for Sales Order


14. Check Stock Status
15. Pick Materials on Delivery Note
16. Post Goods Issue
17. Check Stock Status
18. Bill Customer
19. Post Receipt of Customer Payment
20. Review Document Flow

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 112

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 113

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 114

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 38


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 3
Financial Accounting
(FI)

- Overview -

SAP Enterprise System

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 116

Unit 3, Part 1 – Overview

• Financial Accounting (FI)


– Goals and Objectives
– Target Audience
– Components
• Managerial Accounting (CO)
– Goals and Objectives
– Target Audience
– Components
• Comparisons and Relationships

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 117

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 39


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 118

Goals and Objectives

• Financial accounting is designed to collect all of


the data needed to support the preparation of
financial statements for external users

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 119

Target Audience

Internal External
• Executives • Legal Authorities
• Senior Management • Banks
• Accounts • Auditors
• Administration Staff • Shareholders
• Employees • Insurance
• Taxing Authorities
• Media
• Financial Analysts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 120

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 40


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Components of Financial Accounting

Accounts
Receivable

Financial General Fixed


Accounting Ledger Assets

(FI) Accounts
Banks
Payable
Special
Purpose
Ledger

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 121

Controlling (CO)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 122

Goals and Objectives

• Managerial accounting is designed to collect


data for the preparation and analysis of reports
for use by internal users

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 123

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 41


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Target Audience

• Executives
• Senior Management
• Department Managers
• Controllers
• Cost Accountants

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 124

Components of Managerial Accounting

Internal
Orders
Cost
Profitability
Element
Analysis
Acct
Activity
Controlling Based
(CO) Cost
Costing
Profit
Center Center
Acct Acct
Product
Cost
Controlling

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 125

Comparison

Financial Accounting Managerial Accounting


• External Accounting • Cost Center Accounting
– Balance Sheet • Profit Center Accounting
– Profit & Loss Statement • Product Costing
• Legal Requirements • Profitability Analysis
• Standards • Different Valuations
• Flexibility

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 126

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 42


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Comparative Reporting

Liquidity
Calculation Retained
Earnings
Financial Accounting (FI) Balance
Report
Sheet
Income
External Statement
Reporting

Cost
Center
Reports
Product
Managerial Accounting (CO) Costs Profit
Reports Profit Margin
Center
Internal Reports
Reporting

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 127

Interrelated and Closely Connected

(FI) Transaction
Document Income Statement Bal. Sheet
Supplies Exp. Bank
Amount
100 100
G/L Account #
Cost Center
1900012432 Financial Accounting

(CO) Transaction Cost Center


Document
Cost Center 100

Cost Element
20000657 Controlling
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 128

Financial Accounting
(FI)

- The Basics -

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 43


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 3, Part 2 – Overview

• General Ledger
• Chart of Accounts
• Balance Sheet
– Assets
– Liabilities
– Equity
• Income Statement
– Revenues
– Expenses

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 130

General Ledger

• The General Ledger provides a complete record


of all "acceptable" business transactions from
the viewpoint of an accountant
• An acceptable business transaction has the
following traits
– Affects the financial position of the entity
– Measurable in a currency
– Affects at least two accounts
– Assets = Liabilities + Equity
– Debits = Credits

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 131

Chart of Accounts

• The foundation for the General Ledger is the


Chart of Accounts
• A Chart of Accounts contains a complete list of
all of the accounts utilized in the General Ledger
for a given company
• Financial accounting reports are prepared from
the balances contained in the General Ledger’s
Chart of Accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 132

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 44


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Chart of Accounts (continued)

• There are five types of accounts contained in a


Chart of Accounts
– Assets
– Liabilities
– Equity
– Revenues
– Expenses
• There are two primary accounting reports
prepared from the General Ledger Chart of
Accounts
– Balance Sheet
– Income Statement
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 133

Balance Sheet – Assets

• Things of value that a company owns or controls


that accountants have agreed to measure in
monetary terms.
• Examples of these accounts include:
– Cash
– Accounts receivables
– Plant and equipment
– Inventory

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 134

Balance Sheet – Liabilities

• Things that a company owes or must provide


services in order to settle that accountants have
agreed to measure in monetary terms.
• Examples of these accounts include:
– Accounts payable
– Notes payable
– Bonds payable
– Unearned revenue

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 135

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 45


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Balance Sheet – Equity

• Equity is simply the mathematical difference


between assets and liabilities.
• Includes the monetary amounts collected with
respect to all preferred and common stock
transactions, the aggregate net income reported
since organization of the company, and a
reduction for dividends that have been paid to
stockholders.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 136

Balance Sheet

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 137

Income Statement – Revenues

• The monetary amounts collected from


customers in settlement for goods purchased
from our company or services rendered by our
firm to them during the current fiscal year.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 138

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 46


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Income Statement – Expenses

• The monetary amounts paid to vendors in


settlement for goods purchased by our company
or services rendered to our firm by other
companies during the current fiscal year.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 139

Income Statement

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 140

Financial Accounting
(FI)

- Organizational Structures -

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 47


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Process Integration


Org Data

FI

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 142

Organizational Data

• A hierarchy in which the organizational units in


an enterprise are arranged according to tasks
and functions
• Are static data and are rarely changed
• The definition of organization units is a
fundamental step, it is a critical factor in how the
company will be structured

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 143

Unit 3, Part 3 – Org Structures

• Organizational Structures
– Client
– Company
– Chart of accounts
– Company code
– Credit control area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 144

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 48


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Client

• Highest hierarchical level in an SAP


environment
• A complete database containing all the
tables necessary for creating a fully
integrated information system
• Master records are created at the client
level

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 145

Client

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 146

Company

• Consolidated financial statements are created at


the company level
• A company can include one or more company
codes
• All company codes must use the same chart of
accounts and fiscal year
• Company is not required in the definition of an
enterprise (optional)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 147

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 49


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Structure

Client

Company

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 148

Company Code

• A legally independent entity


• The smallest organizational unit for which
accounting can be carried out
• Business transactions are processed at this level
• Accounts are managed at this level
• Legal financial statements, such as the balance
sheet and the income statement, are generated
at this level using the General Ledger balances

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 149

Organizational Structure

Client

Company

Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 150

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 50


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Chart of Accounts

• A listing of the accounts (assets, liabilities,


equity, revenues, and expenses) that are
contained in the General Ledger
• A chart of accounts must be assigned to every
company code in order to create the General
Ledger for that company
• Several company codes can use the same chart
of accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 151

Chart of Accounts

United States Canadian


Chart of Chart of
Accounts Accounts

Company Company Company Company


Code 010 Code 038 Code 110 Code 117
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 152

Organizational Structure

Client

Chart of
Company
Accounts

Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 153

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 51


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Fiscal Year Variant

• Specifies the accounting fiscal year for reporting


purposes
• Special periods are created to aid in the
quarterly or year-end adjusting process
completed prior to preparing financial
statements
• A single fiscal year variant is assigned to each
company code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 154

Organizational Structure

Client

Chart of Fiscal Year


Company
Accounts Variant

Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 155

Credit Control Area

• An organizational unit or area of responsibility


created to control customer credit limits
• A company code is assigned to one and only
one credit control area
• Multiple company codes can be assigned to one
credit control area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 156

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 52


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Structure

Client

Chart of Fiscal Year


Company
Accounts Variant

Credit Control
Area

Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 157

Organizational Structure

Client

Chart of Fiscal Year


Company
Accounts Variant

Credit Control
Area

Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 158

Consolidation and Business Areas

Company
• A company is an organizational unit in Financial
Accounting which represents a business organization
according to the requirements of commercial law in a
particular country.
Business Areas
• A unit in an enterprise that groups product and market
combinations as homogeneously as possible for the
purpose of developing unified business policy.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 159

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 53


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Optional Organizational Structures

GM Corp.
Client
Chart of Accts
GM–Corporate General Corporate
Credit CA Motors Fiscal Year Var.
Consolidation of Company Codes

Chevrolet GMC Cadillac

Business Areas
Cars Cars

Trucks Trucks Trucks


January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 160

Client 100

Credit Control Pen Inc. Fiscal Year


Area Variant

Chart of
Accounts
Company
Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 161

Unit 3 – Exercises

21. Create Company Code


22. Create Chart of Accounts
23. Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts
24. Assign Company Code to Fiscal Year Variant
25. Create Credit Control Area
26. Assign Company Code to Credit Control Area
27. Assign Permitted Credit Control Area to
Company Code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 162

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 54


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 4
Material Management
(MM)

- Organizational Structures -

Business Process Integration


Org Data

MM

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 164

Organizational Data

• A hierarchy in which the organizational units in


an enterprise are arranged according to tasks
and functions
• Are static data and are rarely changed
• The definition of organization units is a
fundamental step, it is a critical factor in how the
company will be structured

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 165

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 55


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 166

Unit 4 – Overview

• Unit Concept
• Purchasing and SAP R/3
• Procurement Process
• Organizational Structures
• Organizational Relationships
• Warehouse Management

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 167

Unit Concept

• The purchasing process involves the acquisition of


goods and services to support the creation of
goods and services in the organization
• In this unit the structure required for the purchasing
process is presented

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 168

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 56


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Purchasing and SAP R/3

• The purchasing process exists in the Materials


Management (MM) module of SAP R/3 and
Finance (FI) module
• The structure includes elements of the Materials
Management (MM) and Finance (FI) modules
• Master data for the purchasing process exists in
the (MM) and (FI) modules
• The purchasing process can and does interface
with the Production Planning (PP), Warehouse
Management (WM), and Quality Management
(QM) modules
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 169

Components of Materials Management

Foreign
Valuation Trade/
Customs
Logistics
Service
Invoice
Master
Verification
Materials
Product
Management Purchasing MRP
Catalog
(MM) Material
Service
Entry
Master
Sheet
Inventory Physical
Mgmt. Inventory

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 170

Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
3-Way Vendor
Match
Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 171

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 57


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Structures

• Plant
• Valuation Area
• Storage Locations
• Purchasing Organizations
• Purchasing Groups

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 172

Plant

• Lowest valuation area


• Organizational level where Material
Requirements (MRP) runs
• Generally used to describe a production site, a
distribution center or centralized warehouse
• May be a physical or logical unit

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 173

Valuation Area

• The valuation area determines at which level a


material is valuated (inventory value is
established)
• SAP R/3 allows valuation at the company code
or plant level, but recommends valuation area
be set at the plant level

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 174

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 58


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Storage Location

• Subdivision of a plant
• Where materials are managed (inventory
management)
– Raw Materials
– Maintenance, Repair, and Other (MRO)
– Finished Product
• May be a physical or logical unit

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 175

Organizational Relationships

• Plant/Storage Location

Plant P001

Storage Location Storage Location


10 - Inventory 20 - Quality

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 176

Purchasing Organization

• Organizational unit responsible for the


procurement of materials and services.
• SAP requires that purchasing organizations be
assigned at the plant level
• A purchasing organization can be assigned to
more than one plant
• A purchasing organization can be assigned to a
company code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 177

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 59


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Relationships

• Plant/Purchasing Organization (1)

Plant P001

Purchasing Purchasing
Organization – P001 Organization – P002

One plant – multiple purchasing


organizations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 178

Organizational Relationships
(Continued)

• Plant/Purchasing Organization (2)

Plant P001 Plant P002

Purchasing Purchasing
Organization – P001 Organization – P002

Each plant has its own purchasing


organization
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 179

Organizational Relationships
(Continued)

• Plant/Purchasing Organization (3)

Purchasing
Organization – P001

Plant – P001 Plant – P002

One purchasing organization for


multiple plants
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 180

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 60


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Relationships
(continued)

• Plant/Purchasing Organization (4)

Purchasing
Organization – P001

Company Code Company Code


C001 C002

Plant – P001 Plant – P002

One purchasing organization for multiple


company codes
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 181

Purchasing Group

• Responsible for specified purchasing activities


• Often used to identify individual buyers
• Used for reporting

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 182

Organizational Relationships

• Purchasing Organization/Purchasing Group

Purchasing
Organization – P001

Purchasing Group Purchasing Group


001 002

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 183

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 61


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Organizational Structure

Company Code
C001

Purchasing
Organization – P001
Plant P001

Purchasing Storage Location Storage Location


10 - Inventory 20 - Quality
Group
001

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 184

Warehouse Management

• Not required for the purchasing functionality of


SAP R/3
• A separate module in the SAP R/3 environment
• Many functions and elements can be performed
outside of the module

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 185

Warehouse Management Elements

• Receiving, identifying and sorting goods


• Placing goods into storage bins
• Taking inventory
• Monitoring and inspecting goods in storage
• Preplanning distribution of materials
• Picking and accumulating orders
• Packaging, loading and shipping goods

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 186

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 62


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Warehouse Management Relationships

Company C001
Inventory Company Code
Management Plant P001 Plant P002
(MM) Plant
Storage Loc. 10 Storage Loc. 20 Storage Loc. 30 Storage Loc. 40
Storage Loc.

Warehouse 1 Warehouse 1
Warehouse

Aisle 1 Aisle 2 Aisle 3 Aisle 1 Aisle 2


Aisle
Rack 1 Rack 1 Rack 1
Storage Rack

Warehouse ABC123
Quantity
Management (WM)
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 187

Unit 4 – Exercises

28. Verify Valuation Area


29. Define Plant (P_ _ _)
30. Define Storage Locations for Inventory and
Quality
31. Define Purchasing Organization
32. Create Purchasing Groups
33. Assign Plant to Company Code
34. Assign Purchasing Organization to Company
Code
35. Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant
36. Setup Parameter ID

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 188

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 189

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 63


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 5
Financial Accounting (FI)

- Rules (Internal Controls) -

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 191

Unit 5 – Rules

• Rules
– Account groups
• BS – Balance Sheet Account Group
• PL – Income Statement Account Group
• RA – Reconciliation Account Group
– Field status variant
• Field status groups
– Fiscal year variant

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 192

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 64


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Account Groups

Chrt/accts Acct group Description From To


CHRT BS Balance Sheet 100000 399999
CHRT PL Income Sheet 400000 999999
CHRT RA Reconciliation 110000 310000

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 193

Account Groups

• Identifier that controls which fields must be entered


when an account is created
• Determine a valid number interval for each of the
groups (types) of General Ledger accounts that
have common attributes
• Must be created before General Ledger Chart of
Accounts master records can be created
• You must assign each account to an appropriate
account group

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 194

Account Groups

Account Group BS

Account control
Account management
Document entry
Bank/financial details
Interest calculation
Joint venture

Account control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display

Currency
Tax category
Reconciliation account

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 195

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 65


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Field Status

• Field status controls how the data will be entered


for a field when an accounting master record is
being used in a transaction
• Determining whether a field is required, optional,
suppressed, or display only
• Field status controls are also relevant to a
specific activity — create, change, or display

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 196

Field Status Variant

Fld status groupText


ZALL All Accounts
ZBSA Balance Sheet Accounts
ZEXP Expense Accounts
ZGRI Material Management (GR/IR) Accounts
ZRCN Reconciliation Accounts
ZREV Revenue Accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 197

Field Status Variant

Field status variant (V000) - Group ZBSA - Balance Sheet Acct.

General data
Additional account assignments
Materials management
Payment transactions
Asset accounting
Taxes
...
General Data Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display

Assignment number
Text
Invoice reference

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 198

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 66


ECC 6.0 January 2008

So What is a Reconciliation Account?

• Postings to sub-ledgers (such as accounts


receivable or accounts payable) are
automatically concurrently posted to the
corresponding reconciliation account in the
General Ledger
• In this way, the General Ledger is automatically
updated and remains in balance with the
customer and vendor individual account totals

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 199

Unit 5 – Exercises

37. Create Account Groups


38. Define Retained Earnings Account
39. Review Field Status Variant
40. Assign Company Code to Field
Status Variant

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 200

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 201

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 67


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 6
Financial Accounting (FI)

- Master Data -

Business Process Integration


Master
Data

FI

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 203

Master Data

• Master data is relatively fixed


– Material master data
– Vendor master data
– Purchasing information record
– General Ledger master data
• Before making the master data configurations,
you must have completely defined the
organizational structures

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 204

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 68


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 205

Unit 6 – Overview

• General Ledger Master Data


– Chart of Accounts Data
– Company Code Data
– Reconciliation Accounts
• Accounts Receivable
• Accounts Payable
• Goods Receipt/Invoice Receipt
• General Ledger Account Balances

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 206

General Ledger – Master Data

• A unique master record is created for each


General Ledger account
• General Ledger accounts are created at the
client level
• Business transactions are posted to the portfolio
of General Ledger accounts made available to a
company through the assignment of a specific
Chart of Accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 207

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 69


ECC 6.0 January 2008

General Ledger – Master Data


(continued)

• Contains control information for:


– Data entry
– Data processing
• Specifies the account type:
– Balance sheet
– Income statement

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 208

General Ledger
Organization of the Data

• Contains one or more Chart of Accounts specific


information areas
• Contains one or more Company Code specific
information areas
• In this way, a General Ledger master account
can be shared by several combinations of
Charts of Accounts and Company Codes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 209

General Ledger
Chart of Accounts Data

• Account number Account number 100101


• Name of the Chart of Chart of accounts CPEN
Accounts
• Account group provides Account group BS

information that controls P&L statement acct type


the creation of the Balance sheet account X

master record for a


company code

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 210

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 70


ECC 6.0 January 2008

General Ledger
Company Code Data

• Local currency
• Foreign currency
• Tax category
• Open item management
• Line item display
• Sort key

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 211

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Local currency
– Specify the currency in which the account is to be
posted
– Transaction figures are always updated and displayed
in local currency

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 212

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Foreign currency
– Specify the alternative currency in which the account
is to be posted
– It is possible to select up to two alternative currencies
– Transaction figures will be updated in both the local
and alternative currencies

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 213

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 71


ECC 6.0 January 2008

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Tax category
– Specify the type of tax on purchase and sales (input
or output taxes) that can be posted to the account
– If the account is not tax relevant, do not make a
specification in this field

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 214

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Open item management


– Indicates that the account is subjected to an
affirmative clearing process involving the matching of
debits to credits with the purpose of closing each
individual line item
– For example, reconciliation accounts
– You can only archive an accounting document if all of
its individual line items have been cleared

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 215

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Line item display


– Select if it is desirable to view all the debit and credit
detail for the account
– Remember that when posting items to such accounts
and displaying line items, additional storage space
and system time are required

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 216

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 72


ECC 6.0 January 2008

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Line item display should not be used for the


following accounts:
– Reconciliation accounts
– Accounts that have a summation function and are
analyzed by another application such as revenue or
stock accounts
– Output and input tax accounts, since tax information
is required only in connection with the document

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 217

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Sort Key
– Necessary when line item display is selected
– Determines the data field that will be used to sort the
line items
• Posting date
• Document date
• Cost center

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 218

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

• Reconciliation accounts
– When you post to a sub-ledger, the system
automatically concurrently posts to the corresponding
reconciliation account in the general ledger
– In this way, the general ledger is automatically
updated and remains in balance with the individual
account totals

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 219

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 73


ECC 6.0 January 2008

General Ledger
Company Code Data (continued)

General
Ledger General Ledger
Debit Credit Reconciliation Accounts
A/R, A/P, GR/IR
$$ $$

A/R A/P GR/IR


Subsidiary
Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit Ledger Accounts
$$ $$ $$ $$ $$ $$
A/R, A/P, GR/IR

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 220

Accounts Receivable
Reconciliation Account

Customer 189 Customer 142


Accounts Receivable
100 300 Reconciliation

950

Customer 135 Customer 123

400 150

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 221

Accounts Receivable Integration

MM Goods Sales SD
Materials
Mgmt.
Issue Order Sales and
Distribution

FI
Financial FI
Accounting Financial
Accounting

CGS Revenue
Decrease to Inventory FI Increase to A/R
Financial
Accounting

Income Statement
Balance Sheet
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 222

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 74


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account

Vendor 100234 Vendor 100435


Accounts Payable
200 250 Reconciliation

950

Vendor 100621 Vendor 100846

100 300

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 223

Accounts Payable Integration

MM
MM Goods Invoice Materials
Mgmt.
Materials
Mgmt.
Receipt Receipt

FI FI
Financial Financial
Accounting Accounting

Increase to Inventory Increase to A/P


FI
Increase to GR/IR Financial Decrease to GR/IR
Accounting

Balance Sheet

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 224

Line Item Display

Account number 100999 Bank Account


Company code C999

Period Debit Credit DC bal. Balance


C/f bal. 750,000.00
Period 1 5,250.00 3,540.00 1,710.00 751,710.00
Period 2 25,000.00 15,000.00 10,000.00 761,710.00

Period 1
Doc. no. DT Doc.date Currency Amount
1500000013 KZ 01/05/04 USD 1,800.00 -
1500000014 KZ 01/06/04 USD 990.00 -
100000012 SA 01/08/04 USD 750.00 –
1400000342 DZ 01/14/04 USD 5,250.00
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 225

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 75


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 6, Group 1 – Exercises

41. Create Bank Account


42. Create Accounts Receivable Reconciliation
Account
43. Create Trading Goods Inventory Account
44. Create Operating Supplies Inventory Account
45. Create Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account
46. Create Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt
Reconciliation Account
47. Create Output Tax Account
48. Create Input Tax Account
49. Create Retained Earnings Account
50. Create Common Stock Account

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 226

Unit 6, Group 2 – Exercises

51. Create Trading Goods Consumption Expense


Account
52. Create Operating Supplies Expense Account
53. Create Utilities Expense Account
54. Create Purchase Price Difference Expense
Account
55. Create Information Technology Expense Account
56. Create Miscellaneous Expense Account
57. Create Cost of Goods Sold
58. Run General Ledger List of Accounts Report

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 227

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 228

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 76


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 7
Materials Management
(MM)

- Master Data and Rules -

Business Process Integration


Master
Rules

Data

MM
MM

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 230

Master Data

• Master data is relatively fixed


– Material master data
– Vendor master data
– Purchasing information record
– General Ledger master data
• Before making the master data configurations, you
must have completely defined the organizational
structures

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 231

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 77


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and
Sales and Financial
Distribution
Distribution Accounting
MM
MM CO
Materials
Materials Mgmt. Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions
Solution
s

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 232

Unit 7, Part 1 – Overview (Master Data)

• Unit Concept
• Procure-to-Pay Process
• Vendor Master Data
• Purchasing Information Record

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 233

Unit Concept

• The purchasing process involves the acquisition


of goods and services to support the creation of
goods and services in the organization
• Master data and rules required for the
purchasing process is presented

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 234

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 78


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
3-Way Vendor
Match
Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 235

Master Data – General

• Business rules and supportive information are


stored in master data records
• Each master data record is unique in name or
number
• Internal or external number ranges are possible
• Usually created or converted (legacy system) in
the beginning
• Maintained by numerous organizations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 236

Master Data – General (continued)

• Vendor master records are maintained by both


accounts payable (A/P) and purchasing
• Material master records are maintained by
purchasing, sales, production, accounting, etc.
• Purchasing information records are maintained
primarily by purchasing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 237

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 79


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Vendor Master
Organization of the Data

ta:
l Da
era
General Data Gen ddress
A Pu
rch
a
Da sing
ta

Company Code Data


Financial Accounting (FI) Vendor 10001

Purchasing Organization
Data (MM)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 238

Vendor Master Data

• A master record must be created for every


vendor
• General data, Company Code data (Financial
Accounting - FI), and Purchasing Org data
(Material Management - MM)

General data Company code data Purch. org data


Address Account Purchasing data
Control data management Partner functions
Payment Payment
transactions transactions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 239

Vendor Master

• Includes all data necessary for processing


business transactions and corresponding with
vendors
• Information is shared between the accounting
and purchasing departments

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 240

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 80


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Vendor Master – Typical Screens

• Address
• Control
• Payment Transactions
• Accounting Information
• Correspondence
• Purchasing Data
• Partner Functions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 241

Vendor Master
General Data – Address

General Data – Address

Address
Vendor Name
Search Term
Street address
City, Region Postal code
Country
Communication
Language
Telephone, Fax, E-Mail

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 242

Vendor Master
General Data – Control Data

• Account Control
– Customer
– Authorization
– Trading partner
– Group key
• Tax Information
– Tax codes
– Fiscal address
– Country code
– City code
• Reference Data / Area
– International locator number
– Industry
– Transport zone

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 243

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 81


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Vendor Master
General Data – Payment Transactions

• Bank Details
– Bank Key
– Bank Account
– Account Holder
– Partner Bank Type
• Payment Transactions
– Alternative Payee
– Instruction Key

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 244

Vendor Master – Company Code –


Accounting Information

• Accounting Information
– Reconciliation Account
– Sort Key
– Release Group
• Interest Calculation
– Interest Calculation Indication
– Interest Calculation Frequency
• Withholding Tax
– Withholding Tax Code
– Exemption Number

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 245

Vendor Master – Company Code –


Payment Transactions

• Payment Data
– Payment Terms
– Tolerance Group
– Check Double Invoice
– Check Cashing Time
• Automatic Payment Transactions
– Payment Methods
– Alternate Payee
– Payment Block
• Invoice Verification
– Tolerance Group
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 246

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 82


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Vendor Master – Company Code –


Correspondence Accounting

• Dunning Data
– Dunning Procedure
– Dunning Block
– Dunning Recipient
– Date of Legal Dunning Procedure
• Correspondence
– Local Processing
– Accounting Clerk
– Account With Vendor

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 247

Vendor Master – Purch. Org. Data –


Purchasing Data

• Conditions • Control Data


– Order Currency – Acknowledgement
– Terms of Payment Required
– Incoterms – Returns to Vendor
– Minimum Order Value – Automatic Purchase
Order
• Sales Data
– Salesperson
• Default Data Material
– Purchasing Group
– Planned Delivery Time

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 248

Vendor Master – Purch. Org. Data –


Partner Functions

• Partner Functions
– Partner Function
– Partner Name

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 249

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 83


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Vendor Master – Purch. Org. Data –


Account Group

• Vendor masters are assigned to a vendor


account group
• Through field status maintenance, vendor
account groups can be setup for one-time
vendors, regional vendors, and internal vendors
• The vendor account group controls both type
and number range assignment for vendors

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 250

Purchasing Info Record

• The purchasing info record provides


continuously updated information about the
relationship of a specific material with a specific
vendor
• Order unit, price, price changes, tolerances,
reminder infos, historic data, statistics, texts
• Choice of automatic or manual updating

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 251

Source List

• The source list stores information about where to


acquire a given material for a given period of
time
• It specifies whether this source should be used
by Materials Requirement Planning (MRP)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 252

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 84


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 7, Group 1 – Exercises

59. Vendor Account Groups


60. Create Vendor Master Accounting Record
61. Create Vendor Master Purchasing Record
62. Create Vendor Master Record Centrally
63. Create Vendor Master Record Centrally
64. Create Vendor Master Record Centrally

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 253

Unit 7, Part 2 – Overview (Rules)

• Fiscal Period
• Plant Parameters
• MRP

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 254

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 255

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 85


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Fiscal Period

• In order to execute any material postings, the


current fiscal period has to be activated
• By initializing the company code for material
management, the first major integration between
Financial Accounting (FI) and Logistics is
completed

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 256

Plant Parameters

• Material Requirements Planning (MRP)


controllers
– Individuals responsible for running and maintaining
Material Requirements Planning data and reports
• Negative stock allowance
– If a material is allowed to go negative for inventory
stock

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 257

Plant Parameters – (continued)

• Purchasing
– Special purchasing rules
– External purchasing only settings
• Planned orders
– Rescheduling
– Conversion to purchase requisitions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 258

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 86


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Plant Parameters – (continued)

• Document number ranges


– Planned orders
– Purchase requisitions
– Material Requirements Planning (MRP) lists
– Reservations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 259

Material Requirements Planning

• Detailed planning level


• Primary Functions
– Monitor inventory stocks
– Determine material needs
• Quantity
• Timing
– Generate purchase or production orders

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 260

Materials Requirements Planning


(continued)

• Integrates Production Planning (PP) module with


the Materials Management (MM) module
• Prerequisites for Materials Requirement
Planning (MRP)
– Activate Material Requirements Planning (MRP) for a
plant
– Material Master created
• Material Requirements Planning view
• Material Requirements Planning type

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 261

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 87


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Requirements Planning


Basic Process

• Exploding the Bill of Material (if using


production)
• Netting Out Inventory
• Lot Sizing
• Time-phasing requirements

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 262

Material Requirements Planning


Net Requirements

• Material Requirements Planning (MRP)


calculates the quantity of material needed, if
any, based on
– Sales Orders
– Material Reservations
– Repair Parts
– Inventory
– Purchase Orders
– Etc…

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 263

Material Requirements Planning


Net Requirements – (continued)

• If adequate inventory is not available to meet


Material Requirements Planning (MRP) needs
then the system generates
– Planned Production Orders
– Planned Purchase Orders

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 264

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 88


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Requirements Planning


Lot Sizing

• Static
– Based on fixed values in the Material Master
• Periodic
– Groups net requirements together from multiple
periods
• Optimum
– Calculates the optimum lot size for a several periods
of net requirements

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 265

Unit 7, Group 2 – Exercises

65. Initialize Fiscal Period for Company Code


66. Maintain Plant Parameters for Material
Management
67. Activate Materials Requirements Planning

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 266

Unit 7, Part 3
Overview (Material Master)

• Industry Sector
• Material Type
• Maintenance Features
• Organizational Levels
• Primary Views

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 267

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 89


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Industry Sector

• Records are grouped according to industry


sector and material type
• Determines the industry specific data that will
appear on the master record

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 268

Material Master – Material Type

• Material types group materials with the


same attributes
• Material type information determines:
– What views are maintained
– Whether internal or external procurement is allowed
– If changes in material quantity are updated
– Which general ledger accounts are updated

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 269

Material Master – Material Types

• Standard material types are used in all


industries.
– ROH: Raw Materials
• Purchased externally only
• No sales view
– HAWA: Trading Goods
• Always purchased externally
• Sold without any change to the material
• No manufacturing views exist

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 270

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 90


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Material Types


(continued)

– FERT: Finished Products


• Are produced internally
• Normally no purchasing views exist

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 271

Material Master
Additional Material Types

• HIBE: Operating Supplies


• VERP: Customer returnable packaging
• LEER: Empty containers
• KMAT: Configurable material
• ERSA: Spare parts
• DIEN: Services

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 272

Material Master
Additional Material Types (continued)

• NLAG: Non-stock, non-valuated material


• UNBW: Non-valuated, stocked material
• FHMI: Production resources/tools
• WETT: Competitive products
• PROD: Product group
• IBAU: Maintenance assembly
(Plant Maintenance)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 273

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 91


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master Maintenance

• Defaults - speeds entry of data by using the


most frequently used field values (plant,
purchasing organization, etc.)
• Reference Material - speeds entry of data by
copying data from existing material master
• Profiles - speeds entry of data by copying
standard data created in a profile into a selected
view Materials Requirements Planning (MRP)
• Collective entry of storage location data - speeds
creation of multiple storage locations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 274

Material Master Data

• Material master data can be related to all


organizational levels
• General information of a material (description,
number, base unit of measure)
– Has to be related to the highest level of organization -
the client

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 275

Material Master – Levels

• Client
– Description
– Units of measure
– Material number
– Engineering data
• Plant
– Planning data
– Manufacturing data
– Purchasing data

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 276

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 92


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Levels (continued)

• Storage Location
– Stock quantities

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 277

Material Master – Views

• Basic data 1, 2
• Classification
• Sales: sales organization data 1, 2
• Sales: general/plant data
• Sales text
• Purchasing
• Purchase order text
• Forecasting

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 278

Material Master – Views (continued)

• MRP 1, 2, 3, 4
• Work scheduling
• Storage
• Warehouse management
• Quality management
• Accounting 1, 2
• Costing 1, 2

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 279

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 93


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Material Management

• Basic Data
g
sin
• Purchasing cha
Pur iew
V MR
P
• MRP 1,2,3 Vie 1
w
• General Plant
Data/Storage Barrel Pen
• Accounting 1

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 280

Material Master – Basic Data

• General data
– Basic Unit of Measure
• Unit of measure in which stocks of the material are managed
– Material Group
• Key that you use to group together several materials or
services with the same attributes
– Division
• Used to determine the sales area and the business area for a
material, product, or service

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 281

Material Master – Basic Data


(continued)

• Dimensions/EANs
– Gross weight
• Used to check storage capacity in warehouse
– Net weight
• Weight excluding packaging and extras – this is needed for
sales and distribution
– Weight Unit
• Unit of Measure for weight
– Volume
• The space that the material occupies per unit of volume

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 282

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 94


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Purchasing View

• General Data
– Order Unit
• The unit of measure in which a company purchases the
product
– Purchasing Group
• Key for a buyer or a group of buyers, who is/are responsible
for certain purchasing activities.
• Purchasing Values
– Purchasing Value Key
• Define the reminder days and tolerance limits for purchasing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 283

Material Master – Plant Data/Storage 1

• General Data
– Container Requirements
• Define the regulations that govern which type of container
the material must be stored and shipped in
– Storage Conditions
• Defines the conditions on how a material must be stored or
warehoused
• Shelf Life Data
– Minimum remaining shelf life
• Minimum time the material must keep upon goods receipt
for the goods receipt to be accepted by the system
– Total Shelf Life
• Period of time the material will keep in total, from the date
of production or receipt to the shelf life expiration date

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 284

Material Master – MRP 1

• General Data
– Purchasing Group
• The buyer(s) who are responsible for certain purchasing
activities
• MRP Procedures
– MRP Type
• Determines whether and how the material is planned
– Reorder Point
• If stock falls below this point, the system is flagged to create
a planned order
– MRP Controller
• The person(s) responsible for the material planning

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 285

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 95


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – MRP 1 (continued)

• Lot Size Data


– Lot Size
• The lot sizing procedure to calculate the quantity to be
produced or procured
– Minimum Lot Size
• The smallest order quantity
– Fixed Lot Size
• The quantity to be ordered

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 286

Material Master – MRP 2

• Scheduling
– Planned Delivery Time
• Number of calendar days needed to obtain the material
– Scheduling Margin Key
• Used to determine the floats required for scheduling
• Net Requirement Calculation
– Safety Stock
• Specifies the quantity whose purpose is to satisfy
unexpectedly high demand in the coverage period

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 287

Material Master – MRP 3

• Availability Check
– Specifies whether and how the system checks
availability and generates requirements for materials
planning

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 288

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 96


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master – Accounting 1

• Current Valuation
– Valuation Class
– Allows the stock values of materials of the same
material type to be posted to different G/L
accounts.
– Allows the stock values of materials of different
material types to be posted to the same G/L
account.
– Determines together with other factors the G/L
accounts updated for a valuation-relevant
transaction (Material Movements)
– Price Unit
– Number of units to which the price refers
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 289

Material Master – Accounting 1


(continued)

• Current Valuation
– Price Control Indicator
– The price control used to valuate the stock of a
material (e.g, Standard or Moving Average Price)
– Standard Price
– The valuation of material stocks at standard prices
means that all goods movements are valuated at
the same price over an extended period
– Moving Average Price
– The system calculates the moving average price
automatically by dividing the material value in the
stock account by the total of all storage location
stocks in the plant concerned
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 290

Unit 7, Group 3 – Exercises

68. Define Attribute for Material Types (Set


Updating/Deselect Classification)
69. Create Material Master for Trading Goods
70. (Optional Exercise) Create Material Master for
Operating Supplies

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 291

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 97


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 8
Financial Accounting
(FI)

- Rules -

Business Process Integration


Rules

FI

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 293

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 294

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 98


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 295

Unit 8 – Overview

• Posting Periods
• Tolerance Groups for Account Postings
• Accounts Payable Settlement
• Document Numbers

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 296

Posting Periods

• Before it is possible to post documents, it is


necessary to define posting periods
• Fiscal years are divided into one or more posting
periods
• Each posting period is delimited by both a start
and finish date
• A common division of a fiscal year involves
defining 16 posting periods -- 12 months and 4
quarter ending posting periods

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 297

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 99


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Tolerances Groups for


Account Postings

• Internal control – amount limits that serve to


define the maximum authorization levels for your
employees
– Must be at least one entry for every company code
– Can be defined for an employee group with
employees being assigned to a given group to effect
the control
– Can be undefined at the group level meaning that the
control is effective for everyone who is not a member
of a group

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 298

Tolerances Groups for


Account Postings (continued)

• Internal control – amount limits that serve


to define the maximum authorization levels
for your employees with respect to:
– A single transaction
– A customer or vendor account line item
– Discount percentage granted to a line item
– Payment differences that can be accepted in
settlement of an account (e.g., accounts payable)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 299

Accounts Payable Settlement

Purchase
Order

Payment
Program
Debit Credit
Invoice
Receipt
Verification

Goods
Receipt

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 300

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 100


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Accounts Payable Settlement


(continued)

• Select payment method and bank


• Select items for payment
• Calculate the payment amount, taking account
of cash discount periods
• Post the payment document
• Print payment medium

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 301

Document Numbers

• All posted transactions must have a unique


number assigned to it
• Usually these numbers are system generated
• The numbers serve to specifically identify the
business content of a transaction so that it may
be recalled at a later time
• The actual system stored document number
includes information respecting the year, date,
and company codes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 302

Document Numbers – (continued)

• Before any documents can be posted to a


company or company code, there must be a
number range assigned to the document type
• New transaction document number ranges must
be created at the start of each new fiscal year

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 303

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 101


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 8 – Exercises

71. Define Posting Periods Variant


72. Open and Close Posting Periods
73. Assign Posting Periods Variant to Company
Code
74. Create Tolerance Groups for Account Postings
75. Setup Payment Program
76. Create Tolerance Groups for Accounts
Receivable and Accounts Payable
77. Create Financial Accounting (FI) Document
Numbers

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 304

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 305

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 306

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 102


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 9
Financial Accounting
(FI)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

FI

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 308

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 309

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 103


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 310

Unit 9 – Overview

• Document Principles
• Document Types
• Posting Keys

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 311

Document Principles

• Each completed accounting transaction writes


data to the database and creates a unique
electronic document
• Each document contains information such as:
– Responsible person
– Date and time of the transaction
– Commercial content including company codes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 312

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 104


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Document Principles – (continued)

• An accounting document captures the entire


transaction in a manner that facilitates recall for
reporting purposes
• It remains as a complete unit in the system until
archived
• Once created, a document can not be deleted
from the database

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 313

Document Principles – (continued)

• The SAP R/3 document principle provides a


solid framework for a strong internal control
system
• Audit trails allow an accountant to begin with an
account balance on a financial statement and
trace through the accounting records to the
transactions that support the account balance or
to trace individual transactions to the effected
account balance(s) on a financial statement

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 314

Document Principles – (continued)

• Each posted accounting document has a header

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 315

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 105


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Document Principles – (continued)

• Each posted accounting document has at least


two lines (e.g., debit and credit)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 316

Document Types

• A way to categorize different transactions


– Many different document types are supplied in the
system
• Document types are associated with number
ranges
– All documents of the same document type are stored
in the system by document number
• Determine the type of account that can be
posted to

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 317

Document Types – (continued)

• SA – General ledger account documents


• DR – Customer invoices
• DG – Customer credit memos
• DZ – Customer payments
• KR – Vendor invoices
• KG – Vendor credit memos
• KZ – Vendor payments
• KN – Vendor net invoices and credit memos

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 318

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 106


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Posting Keys

• Determine whether the item to be posted is a


debit or a credit
• Determine the type of account that can be
posted

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 319

Posting Keys – (continued)

The posting key (PK) has


a control function that
pertains to the document
line items.
It determines the
following:
• Account type for
posting the line item
• Debit or credit posting
of line items
• Field status for
additional information

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 320

Posting Keys – (continued)

General Ledger Vendors


Common
40 50 2 3
Posting
Keys

Assets Material Customers

70 75 89 99 0 1

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 321

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 107


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 9 – Exercises

78. Review Document Types


79. Post Initial Cash Investment by Owners
80. Post Purchase of Operating Supplies
81. Display and Review General Ledger Account
Balances and Individual Line Items

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 322

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 323

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 324

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 108


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 10
Financial Accounting
(FI)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

FI

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 326

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 327

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 109


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Financial Accounting (FI)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 328

Unit 10 – Overview

• Monthly Rent Cycle


• Invoice Receipt
• Invoice Entry
• Accounts Payable Settlement

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 329

Monthly Rent Cycle

Rental Invoice
Agreement Receipt

Accounts
Payable

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 330

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 110


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Invoice Receipt

Invoice Invoice
Receipt Verification

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 331

Invoice Entry
Vendor
Information

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 332

Accounts Payable Settlement

• Select payment method and bank


• Select items for payment
• Calculate the payment amount, taking
account of cash discount periods
• Post the payment document
• Print payment medium

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 333

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 111


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 10 – Exercises

82. Create Vendor Master Record for Landlord


83. Create Rent Expense Account
84. Create Invoice Receipt for Rent Expense
85. Display and Review General Ledger Account
Balances and Individual Line Items
86. Display and Review Vendor Account Balances
and Individual Line Items
87. Post Payment to Landlord
88. Display and Review General Ledger and Vendor
Account Balances and Individual Line Items

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 334

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 335

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 336

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 112


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 11
Materials Management
(MM)

- Rules -

Business Process Integration


Rules

MM

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 338

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 339

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 113


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 340

Unit 11 – Overview

• Reservations
• Tolerances
– Purchasing
– Goods Receipt
– Invoice Receipt
• Automatic Account Assignment
• Invoice Verification

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 341

Reservations

• A request to have a material ready for issue at a


future date for a production order, sales order,
etc.
• The purpose of a reservation is to ensure that a
material is available when required and not
assigned to another use

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 342

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 114


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Purchasing Tolerances

• A tolerance limit is set for allowed variance


before a warning/error message is displayed
– Price variance
• Compares the price in the purchase order with the valuation
price stored in the material master
– Maximum cash discount
• This tolerance limit is set to assure that cash discounts do
not exceed allowable discounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 343

Goods Receipts Tolerances

• Purchase order price quantity – there are two


tolerance levels maintained per item
– The maximum percentage variance before a goods
receipt postings is not allowed
– A percent variance that generates a warning
message but allows posting
• Moving average price variance – the maximum
allowable moving average price change allowed

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 344

Invoice Receipts Tolerances

• Many tolerance limits that can be


configured for invoice receipts: price,
quantity, and blanket purchase orders
These tolerances include:
– Amount for item with or without order reference
– Form small differences automatically
– Percentage Over/Under Quantity Variance
– Exceed amount: quantity variance
– Blanket purchase order – value and time limit
– Price variance

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 345

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 115


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Automatic Account Assignment

• Automatic account assignment is created to


avoid manual postings of financial transactions
which follow goods movements to reflect the
values of transferred materials
• Automatic account assignment is used across all
modules to keep track of the values of materials
that are being consumed (e.g., production), or
transferred into other valuation areas of the
company

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 346

Automatic Account Assignment


(continued)

• Automatic account assignment is a set of rules


and master data which enable the financial
tracking of logistics movement

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 347

Automatic Account Assignment


Components

• Components of Automatic Account Assignment


– Chart of Accounts
– Valuation Grouping Code
– Transaction Key
– Modifier for Transaction Key
– Valuation Class

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 348

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 116


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Automatic Account Assignment


Valuation Grouping Code

• Valuation grouping code - groups valuation


areas together
– Example: valuation area is plant, five plants exist in
the company, all five plants use the same accounts.
– Multiple valuation groups are possible

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 349

Automatic Account Assignment


Valuation Grouping Code

Grouping Code Grouping Code


G001 G002

Plant – P001 Plant – P004

Plant – P002 Plant – P005

Plant – P003

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 350

Automatic Account Assignment


Transaction Keys

• Transaction Keys
– The transaction keys are used to determine accounts
or posting keys for line items which are created
automatically by the system.
– The transaction keys are defined in the system.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 351

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 117


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Automatic Account Assignment


Transaction Keys

• Transaction Keys
– Inventory Postings
• BSX
– Offsetting Entry for Inventory Postings
• GBB
– Materials Management Small Differences
• DIF
– Cost (price) differences (PPV)
• PRD
– Goods receipt / inv. receipt clearing acct
• WRX

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 352

Automatic Account Assignment


Modifier

• Modifier – modifies the transaction key for


various movement types
– Blank – Goods receipt from purchase order with
account assignment
– VBR – Goods issue to consumption
– VAX – Goods issue to sales – post to cost of goods
sold
– AUF – Goods receipt from a production order – post
to production settlement
– Etc. – Many others

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 353

Material Types & Valuation Classes

• Account category reference:


– Builds the link between material types and the
valuation class(es)
Material Type Account Category Reference Valuation Class

ROH 0001 – Reference for Raw Materials 3000/3001/3002/3003

HIBE 0002 – Reference for Operating Supplies 3030/3031

HAWA 0005 – Reference for Trading Goods 3100

FERT 0009 – Reference for Finished Products 7920

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 354

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 118


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Types & Valuation Classes

Valuation Class
3000
(Steel)

Valuation Class
Material Type Acct Cat. Ref
3001
ROH (Raw Material) 0001 – Raw Materials
(Paper)

Valuation Class
3003
(Plastics)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 355

Automatic Account Assignment

Valuation Class Valuation Class Valuation Class


3100 (Trading Good) 3100 (Trading Good) 3100 (Trading Good)
Plant P001

Plant P002

Plant P003

Grouping Code Grouping Code Grouping Code


G000 G000 G001

Goods Movement Goods Movement Goods Movement


GBB (Goods Issue) GBB (Goods Issue) GBB (Goods Issue)

Account Modifier Account Modifier Account Modifier


VBR (Iss. To Cons.) VBR (Iss. To Cons.) VBR (Iss. To Cons.)

Account Account
790000
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008
790001 356

Automatic Account Assignment

Where Value
What: Where Valued: Why 1: Why 2: is recorded:

Goods Additional Chart of


Material Valuation Area Movement Information Accounts

Represented Valuation Valuation Transaction Account


By: Class Grouping Code Event Key Modifier G/L Account

Points To: Material Type Plant

Where Value
What: Where Valued: Why 1: Why 2: is recorded:
Chart of
Issued to Accounts -
BPEN000 Plant – P001 Good Issue Consumption C000
Represented
By: 3100 G000 GBB VBR 790000

Points To: HAWA Plant – P001

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 357

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 119


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Receipt

• Materials can be received as stock items or non-


stock items
• Receipt is possible from external or internal
sources
• Individually / collectively
• Tolerance limits can be set for goods receipt
• Special movement type for initial inventory load

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 358

Goods Receipt – (continued)

• Stock items can be received into restricted or


unrestricted stock
• Non-stock items are received into orders,
projects, cost centers
• Materials that are usually received into inventory
can also be received into orders, projects, cost
centers

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 359

Invoice Verification

• Set parameters for invoice verification


– Quantity, price, receiving date, P/O quantity
– Updates material master if moving average price
– Automatic account assignment for price differences -
if allowed
• Verify actual versus target

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 360

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 120


ECC 6.0 January 2008

3-Way Match

Purchase order
- Target quantity -
- Target price -

Invoice receipt Goods receipt


- Actual price - - Actual quantity -

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 361

Accounts Payable Settlement

Purchase
Order
Payment
Program
Invoice Debit Credit

Receipt

Verification

Goods
Receipt

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 362

Unit 11, Group 1 – Exercises

89. Set Default Values for Inventory Management


Reservations
90. Maintain Purchasing Tolerance Limits
91. Maintain Goods Receipt Tolerances
92. Maintain Invoice Receipt Tolerances
93. Set (Review) Valuation Control
94. Assign Valuation Area Grouping
95. Define (Review) Valuation Classes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 363

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 121


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 11, Group 2 – Exercises

96. Configure Automatic Postings for Goods


Movement
97. Configure Automatic Postings for Taxes
98. Set Parameters for Invoice Verification
99. Create Default Values for Invoice Verification

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 364

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 365

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 366

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 122


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 12
Materials Management
(MM)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

MM

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 368

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 369

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 123


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 370

Procurement Process
(Procure-to-Pay)

Purchase
Purchase
Requisition
Order

Notify
3-Way Vendor
Match
Payment
to Vendor
Vendor
Shipment
Invoice
Receipt
Goods
Receipt
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 371

Basic Procurement Process

• Requirements Determination - Purchase


Requisition
• Vendor Selection
• Order Processing - Purchase Order
• Order Tracking
• Goods Receipt and Inventory Management
• Invoice Verification
• Payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 372

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 124


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Purchase Requisitions

• Internal document
• Requesting a certain quantity of material or
service on a certain date
• Can be created:
– Manually
– Automatically (Materials Requirements Planning
(MRP), sales orders, etc.)
• Release approval procedures are optional

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 373

Purchase Requisitions Sources

• Manually created by user department


– Office supplies
– Projects
– Prototype materials
• Automatically created by
– Planning (Material Requirements Planning (MRP),
Master Production Schedule (MPS))
– Plant Maintenance
– Production Orders
– Sales Orders

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 374

Purchase Requisitions Processing

• Create purchase requisition (manually or


automatically)
• Determine source of supply
• Release procedure (optional)
• Assign vendor and process

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 375

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 125


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Purchase Requisitions Creating

• Default data for line items


– Delivery dates, plants, purchasing groups, etc.
• Maintain line item data
– Materials, quantities, delivery dates, etc.
• Maintain account assignment (if required)
– Cost center, General Ledger accounts, project
number, etc.
• Check data
• Save

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 376

Purchase Orders

• Purchase Orders are:


– A formal request to a vendor to provide materials or
services
– An internal planning and tracking tool
• Purchase Orders identify:
– Vendor
– Material and/or service
– Quantity and price
– Delivery dates
– Terms of payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 377

Purchase Order Structure


Header

• Header - information specific to the entire


purchase order
– Vendor
– Currency
– Payment terms

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 378

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 126


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Purchase Order Structure


Line Items

• Line item details


– Account assignment
– Delivery schedule
– Materials or services quantity
– Price
– Description
– Item category

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 379

Purchase Order

• Request for Quotations


• Purchase Order
• Order Acknowledgment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 380

Purchase Order – Output Format

• Printed and mailed


• E-mail
• Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
• Faxed (hardcopy or electronic)
• eXtensible Markup Language (XML)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 381

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 127


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Receipt

• Goods receipt with reference to a purchase


order
– Copy data from purchase order
– Delivery notification
– Invoice verification
– Updates purchase order history
– Inventory update
– Automatic update of General Ledger (G/L) accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 382

Goods Receipt (continued)

• You can search for the purchase order number


with
– Material number, vendor number, etc.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 383

Goods Receipt – Destinations

• Stock - given a storage location, can be posted


to three different stock statuses
– Unrestricted-use
– Quality inspection
– Blocked stock (valuated)
• Consumption - can be assigned a recipient or
unloading point
• Goods receipt for blocked stock - updates
inventory, but material is not valuated
(conditional acceptance)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 384

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 128


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Receipt – Movement Types

• Movement types - stock transactions


– Goods receipt
– Goods issue
– Stock transfer
• Movement type determines which
– Quantity fields are updated
– Stock types are updated
– General Ledger (G/L) stock or consumption accounts
are updated
– Fields are displayed during document entry
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 385

Goods Receipt – Movement Types


(continued)

• 101 - goods receipt for purchase order into


warehouse/stores
• 102 - reversal of goods receipt for purchase
order into warehouse/stores
• 122 - return delivery to vendor
• 501 - receipt w/o purchase order into
unrestricted-use stock

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 386

Goods Receipt – Account Postings

• Inventory account is debited at standard price


• Goods Receipt/Inventory Receipt (GR/IR)
clearing account is credited at purchase order
price
• Price difference account is debited (credited)
with difference between standard price and
purchase order price

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 387

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 129


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Receipt – Effects

• Purchase Order (PO) history and Purchase


Order (PO) updated
• Material Master - stock and value updated
• Notification of goods receipt issued (optional)
• Transfer request to Warehouse Management
system (if active)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 388

Goods Receipt – Effects (continued)

• Material and financial documents created and/or


updated
• Stock and consumption accounts updated
• Inspection notification in Quality Management
(QM) - if active

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 389

Invoice Verification

• Matches the vendor’s invoice to the purchase


order and the goods receipt (3rd part of 3-way
match)
• Matches price and quantity
• Updates the purchase order and its history
• Updates accounting information

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 390

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 130


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Invoice Payment

• Selects invoices for payment based on the


payment terms in the vendor master or purchase
order
• Generates payment for released invoices
• Updates accounting information

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 391

3-Way Match for Payment

Purchase
Order
Payment
Program
Invoice Debit Credit

Receipt

Verification

Goods
Receipt

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 392

Accounts Payable Settlement


Process

• Determines:
– Open items to be paid
– When they will be paid
– Bank from which payment will be made
– Payment medium
– Who will get paid
• Payment process creates a financial accounting
document to record the transaction

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 393

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 131


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt


Reconciliation Account

Purchase requisition No impact on


Financial Accounting (FI)
Purchase order
Materials Management (MM)
and Financial Accounting (FI)
Goods receipt via automatic account
assignment

Inventory GR / IR
Dr Cr Dr Cr
$100 $100

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 394

Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt


Reconciliation Account

Amount owed is
Invoice receipt assigned and transferred to
vendor account payable

GR / IR Vendor A/P
Dr Cr Dr Cr
$100 $100

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 395

Vendor Payment

Amount owed is paid to


Bank vendor and account payable
is reduced

Bank Vendor A/P


Dr Cr Dr Cr

$100 $100

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 396

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 132


ECC 6.0 January 2008

(FI – MM) Integration Points

Goods Invoice Payment


Receipt Receipt Program
AP
Inventory GR / IR (Vendor) Bank
Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr

$100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 397

Automatic Account Assignment

• Debit posting $100 • Credit posting $100


• BSX - inventory • WRX goods receipt
posting to trading posting to GR/IR
goods inventory account 310XXX
account 201XXX

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 398

Unit 12 – Exercises

100. Create Purchase Order for Slick Pens


101. Create Purchase Order for Premier Pens
102. Create Purchase Order for Promotions, Ltd.
103. Create Goods Receipts for Purchase Orders
104. Create Invoice Receipts from Vendors
105. Post Payment to Vendors
106. Display Vendor Line Items

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 399

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 133


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 13
Materials Management
(MM)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

MM

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 401

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data is
dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 402

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 134


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Materials Management (MM)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 403

Unit 13 – Overview

• A company may want to establish a long term


purchasing relationship with a vendor
• Its is accomplished through a purchasing
contract (outline agreement or blanket order)
• Purchases of that material from that vendor are
then simplified and streamlined

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 404

Buyer/Supplier Relationships

• Antagonistic – parties view each other as the


enemy (lose/lose)
• Adversarial – each party attempts to maximize
their gain (win/lose)
• Cooperative – parties understand the benefits of
working together (win/win)
• Collaborative – parties look for opportunities to
create value (win/win)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 405

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 135


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Buyer/Supplier Relationships

• Long term partnerships are the objective of the


supplier evaluation and selection process for
contracts
• Traditional purchasing process
– Creates an environment of mistrust and low bidder
mentality
– Leads to higher total purchasing costs

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 406

Supplier Evaluation and Selection

• Identify need for long term supplier contract


• Determine specific sourcing requirements
• Identify potential suppliers
• Determine method of evaluating suppliers
• Select supplier for contract
• Negotiate and execute contract

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 407

Benefits of Managing the


Supply Base

• Contract with only world-class suppliers


• The fewer suppliers the lower the purchasing
overhead
• Purchasing can pursue strategic sourcing
issues, instead of clerical functions
• Streamline the supply chain
• Improved overall quality
• Improved delivery performance

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 408

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 136


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Outline Agreement

• Long-term purchase agreements


• Outline agreements can be subdivided into the
following types:
– Contracts
– Scheduling agreements
• Outline agreements can be subject to a release
(approval or clearance) procedure

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 409

Contract Process Overview

• Step one is to identify and evaluate suppliers


• It may involve supplier development
• The goals are:
– Develop partnerships with good suppliers
– Reduce total cost of purchased materials and
services

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 410

Contracting Questions

• How will potential suppliers be evaluated and


selected?
• What procedures will be required to manage the
contracts (and suppliers)?
• How will performance be measured?
• How many are too many suppliers?
– Too many suppliers cost money
– Supplier integration
– Collaborative agreements
– Supplier development
– Without material production shuts down
• What is the risk?
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 411

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 137


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Contract Management

• Supplier performance metrics


– On-time delivery
– Material and/or service quality
– Returned materials
– Expedite issues
– Pricing analysis
• Problem resolution procedures
– Improve or else
– Continuous improvement process
• When to end the contract

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 412

Creating a Contract

• Is a long-term agreement with a vendor to


provide a material or service
– For an agreed upon period of time
– At a negotiated price or quantity
• Can be created manually or with reference to
purchase requisition, Request for Quote
(RFQ)/quotation etc.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 413

Two Types of Contracts

• Quantity contracts are agreements with a


particular vendor to purchase a specific quantity
of materials. Example: Target quantity of 50,000
meters of electrical wire at $2/meter. (MK)
• Value contracts are similar to quantity contract
except the agreement is to purchase an
established monetary value of materials.
Example: Target value of $100,000 for electrical
wire. (WK)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 414

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 138


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Quotations/Contracts Process

• Requirement for material is identified


• Process followed to select a vendor
– Request for Quotation (RFQ)
– Maintaining a Quotation
– Comparison of Prices
– Creating a Contract
– Creating a Release Order

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 415

Request for Quotation (RFQ)

• Is an invitation to a vendor to indicate their terms


and conditions (in particular, their price) for the
supply of a material or the provision of a service
by submitting a quotation
• Identifies the required material, quantity, and
delivery dates

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 416

Quotation

• A quotation contains the vendor's pricing and


conditions for providing the material or service
stated in the Request for Quotation (RFQ)
• In the SAP component Materials Management
(MM) Purchasing, the RFQ and quotation are
the same document. You enter the vendor's
pricing and conditions in the original RFQ.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 417

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 139


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Maintaining a Quotation

• Enter each vendor's quotation in the associated


Request for Quotation (RFQ)
• Compare prices using the price comparison list
• Store the best quote in an info record
• Optionally, send rejection letters to the losing
bidders

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 418

Comparison of Prices

• You can compare the prices from all quotations


from the competitive bidding process using the
price comparison list
• The comparison list ranks the quotations by item
from lowest to highest price

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 419

Creating a Release Order

• Purchase order that references a contract is


called a release orders, they specify:
– Number of the contract
– Quantity to be released
– Delivery date
• Release order documentation (open quantity,
quantity released to date, total value) is
automatically updated against the contract when
a release order is created

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 420

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 140


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Creating a Release Order (continued)

• The vendor data, price data, and the delivery


terms and conditions are copied directly to the
release order
• Release orders can be created from a proposed
purchase requisition generated off an Materials
Requirement Planning (MRP) run (net
requirements)
– Manually
– Automatically

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 421

Unit 13 – Exercises

107. Create Purchase Outline Agreement (Contract)


for Stock Items
108. Run Materials Requirements Planning – Single
Item, Single Level
109. Convert Proposed Purchase Requisition to
Release Order
110. Review Outline Agreements
111. Create Goods Receipt
112. Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor
113. Post Payment to Vendor

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 422

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 423

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 141


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 14
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Organizational Structures -

Business Process Integration


Org Data

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 425

Organizational Data

• A hierarchy in which the organizational units in


an enterprise are arranged according to tasks
and functions
• Are static data and are rarely changed
• The definition of organization units is a
fundamental step, it is a critical factor in how the
company will be structured

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 426

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 142


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 427

Components of Sales and Distribution

Shipping
Transport
Sales
Sales
Information
Support
Sales and System
Master
Distribution Data
Billing
(SD) Foreign
Sales
Trade
Credit
Mgmt.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 428

Sales Organization

• Sales Organization
– Sells and distributes products
– Negotiates terms of sales
– Responsible for these business transactions
• Critical organization element to the definition of
business markets
• A sales transaction is linked to only one Sales
Organization

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 429

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 143


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales Organization – (continued)

US Sales
S000

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 430

Distribution Channel

• Identifies how products and services reach the


customer
• Can be assigned to one or more Sales
Organizations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 431

Distribution Channel – (continued)

US Sales
S000

Retail Dist Wholesale Dist


Channel (RE) Channel (WH)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 432

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 144


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Division

• Often times used to define product line


distribution
• Organization level to which customer specific
information and requirements are maintained
(e.g. pricing, partial delivery)
• Assigned to one or more Sales Organizations

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 433

Division – (continued)

US Sales
S000

Medical Division Chemical Division

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 434

Sales Area

• Sales Area comprised of:


– Sales Organization
– Distribution Channel
– Division
• Will be used to link together the organizational
aspects of sales to customers
• Used for statistical analysis

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 435

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 145


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales Area – (continued)

US Sales
S000

Retail Dist Wholesale Dist


Channel (RE) Channel (WH)

Medical Chemical Medical Chemical


Division Division Division Division

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 436

Sales Area – (continued)

US Sales
S000

Retail Dist Wholesale Dist


Channel (RE) Channel (WH)

Medical Chemical Medical Chemical


Division Division Division Division

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 437

Internal Sales Organization

• Typically defines a territory or market


• Linked to one or more Sales Areas
• Optional organization structure

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 438

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 146


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales Office

US Sales
S000

Eastern Sales Western Sales

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 439

Sales Group

• Sales Group
– Sub-division of a sales office, territory or market

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 440

Sales Person

• Sales Person
– Defined in Human Resources (HR) — Personnel
Admin.
– Specifically defines an individual rather than a
position (sales rep.) in sales processing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 441

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 147


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Internal Sales Organization

US Sales
S000

Eastern Sales Western Sales

Northeast Southeast Northwest Southwest


Sales Group Sales Group Sales Group Sales Group

Salesperson Salesperson Salesperson Salesperson


1 3 5 7

Salesperson Salesperson Salesperson Salesperson


2 4 6 8

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 442

Shipping and Loading Points

• Shipping Point
– Location that performs all delivery related activities
– Assigned a factory calendar
– A delivery can be processed from only one shipping
point
• Loading Point
– A subdivision of the shipping point used for more
specialized handling

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 443

Shipping Organization

Plant
P000

Freight Dock Express Dock Rail Dock


FD00 ED00 RD00

Loading Loading Loading Loading


Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 444

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 148


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 14, Group 1 – Exercises

114. Create Sales Organization


115. Assign Sales Organization to Company Code
116. Define Distribution Channels
117. Assign Distribution Channels to Sales
Organization
118. Define Division
119. Assign Division to Sales Organization
120. Setup Sales Areas
121. Define Common Distribution Channels
122. Define Common Divisions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 445

Unit 14, Group 2 – Exercises

123. Define Loading Groups


124. Create Shipping Point
125. Assign Plant to Sales Organization and
Distribution Channel
126. Assign Shipping Points to Plant

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 446

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 447

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 149


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 15
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Master Data -

Business Process Integration


Master
Data

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 449

Master Data

• Master data is relatively fixed


– Material Master Data
– Vendor Master Data
– Purchasing Information Record
– General Ledger Master Data
• Before making the Master Data configurations,
you must have completely defined the
organizational structures

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 450

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 150


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 451

Master Data Core Elements

Customer

Master
Data

Material Pricing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 452

Material Master – Sales Views

• Sales: sales org. 1


1
rg.
• Sales: sales org 2 sO
Sale iew Sa
V les
O
• Sales: general/plant Vie rg. 2
w
• Foreign trade export
• Sales: text Barrel Pen

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 453

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 151


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master –
Sales: Sales Org. 1 View

• General Data
– Base Unit of Measure
• The Base Unit of Measure is the unit of measure in which stocks are
managed within your company.
– Division
• You may enter the Division which your product is in for sales
(defaults if entered in the Basic data screen).
– Material Group
• A key that’s used to group several materials or services for
analysis/reporting as well as search by match code.
– Sales Unit
• The unit of measure in which the material is sold, if left blank then
uses the base unit of measure.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 454

Material Master –
Sales: Sales Org. 1 View (continued)

– Delivering Plant
• Plant from which the material is available for sale.
– Cash discount
• Indicator used for materials, which allow for a cash discount.
– Conditions
• Pricing procedure for the material
• Tax Data
– Tax classification material
• The indicator with which the system determines output tax for
the material when processing sales and distribution-specific
documents

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 455

Material Master –
Sales: Sales Org. 1 View (continued)

• Quantity Stipulations
– Minimum Order Quantity
• Minimum quantity a customer may order.
– Minimum Delivery Quantity
– Minimum quantity that may be delivered to a customer
– Delivery Unit
• The delivery unit consists of a number and a unit of
measure. In the case of a delivery unit of 30 pieces, 30, 60,
90, and so on pieces can be delivered, but not, however,
100 pieces.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 456

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 152


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master –
Sales: Sales Org. 2 View

• Grouping Terms
– Material Statistics Group
• Determine which data the system updates in the logistics
information system
– Material Pricing Group
• A way of grouping materials to which you want to apply the
same conditions
– Volume Rebate Group
• Group definition used for rebate settlement.
– General Item Category Group
• Materials grouping that helps the system to determine item
categories during sales document processing.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 457

Material Master –
Sales: Sales Org. 2 View (continued)

• Grouping Terms
– Item Category Group
• A grouping of materials that the system uses to determine
item categories during the processing of sales documents.
– Commission Group
• Commission group to which the material is assigned.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 458

Material Master
Sales: General/Plant View

• General Data
– Base unit
• The unit of measure in which items are managed in the
company
– Gross weight
• Used to check storage capacity in warehouse
– Net weight
• Weight excluding packaging and extras – this is needed for
sales and distribution
– Avail. Check
• Option to do an availability check for orders and MRP

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 459

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 153


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Material Master
Sales: General/Plant View (continued)

• Shipping Data (times in days)


– Transportation Group
• Group materials that have the same transportation
requirements. For example, bulk stock materials
– Loading Group
• Loading groups define materials that have the same loading
requirements, such as forklift truck, or crane.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 460

Material Master
Sales: General/Plant View (continued)

• Packaging Material Data


– Material group Pack Materials
• Materials that require similar packaging materials
• General Plant Parameters
– Negative stock
• Indicates if negative stocks of the material are allowed at the
plant
– Profit Center
• Identifies the profit center in the current controlling area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 461

Material Master
Sales: Sales Texts View

• Sales Texts
– Exchange of information throughout the logistics
chain
– In sales and distribution, this exchange of
information is supported by texts in master records
and documents
– You can define as many text types as you require
(sales texts, shipping texts, internal notes,
supplement texts etc.) for master records and
documents

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 462

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 154


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 15, Group 1 – Exercises

127. Create Sales Views for Trading Goods


128. Create Sales Revenue Account
129. Create Sales Revenue Deduction Account

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 463

Master Data Core Elements

Customer

Master
Data

Material Pricing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 464

Customer Master

Customer Master Data


is created by Sales Sales Area
Area
• Sales Organization US Sales
S000
• Distribution Channel
• Division
Distribution
Division - 01
Channel - RE

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 465

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 155


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master - (continued)

ta:
l Da
era
General Data Gen ddress
A Sa
les
Sa Data
les :

Company Code Data


Financial Accounting (FI) Customer 43

Sales Data
Sales and Distribution (SD)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 466

Customer Master

• A master record must be created for every


customer
• General data, Company Code data (Financial
Accounting - FI), and Sales Org. data (Sales and
Distribution - SD)

General data Company Code data Sales Org. data


Address Account Mgmt Sales
Control data Payment Shipping
Payment transactions Billing
transactions Correspondence Partner Usage

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 467

Customer Master
General Data – Address

General Data – Address

Address
Customer Name
Search Term
Street address
City, Region Postal code
Country
Communication
Language
Telephone, Fax, E-Mail

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 468

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 156


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master
General Data – Control Data

• Account Control
– Vendor
– Authorization
– Trading partner
– Group key
• Tax Information
– Tax codes
– Fiscal address
– Country code
– City code
• Reference Data / Area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 469

Customer Master
General Data – Payment Transactions

• Bank Details
– Country
– Bank Key
– Account holder
– Bank Account
– Control Key
– Collection

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 470

Customer Master
General Data – Marketing

• Classification
– Nielsen ID
– Customer classification
– Industry
– Industry codes
• Operating Figures
– Annual sales
– Number of employees
– Fiscal year variant
• Sales Prospecting
– Legal status

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 471

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 157


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master
General Data – Unloading Point

• Unloading Points
– Unloading point
– Default
– Calendar key
– Default Unloading Point
– Goods receiving hours

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 472

Customer Master
General Data – Foreign Trade

• Export Data
– Country key
– TDO Date (Table of Denial Orders)
– SDN Date (Specially Designated Nationals)
– Boycott Date
• Usage
– Mainly civilian usage
– Mainly military usage
• Classification
– Biochemical warfare
– Nuclear nonproliferation
– National security
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 473

Customer Master
General Data – Contact Persons

• Contact Person
– Name
– First name
– Department
– Function

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 474

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 158


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master
Company Code – Acct Information

• Accounting Information
– Rec. Account
– Sort key
– Head office
• Interest Calculation
– Interest indicator
– Interest cycle
– Interest calculation frequency in months
– Last interest run
• Reference Data
– Previous account number
– Buying group
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 475

Customer Master
Company Code – Payment Transactions

• Payment Data
– Terms of Payment
– Tolerance group
• Automatic Payment Transactions
– Payment methods
– Payment block
– Alternative payer
– Grouping key
– Lockbox

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 476

Customer Master
Company Code – Correspondence

• Dunning Data
– Dunning procedure
– Dunning block
– Dunning recipient
• Correspondence
– Accounting clerk
– Acct at customer
– Customer user
• Payment Notices To
– Customer – Sales
– Accounting – Legal

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 477

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 159


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master
Company Code – Insurance

• Export Credit Insurance


– Policy Number
– Institution Number
– Amount Insure
– Valid Until
– Lead Months
– Deductible

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 478

Customer Master
Sales and Distribution – Sales

• Sales Order
– Sales District
– Sales Office
– Sales Group
– Order Probability
– Item Proposal
• Pricing / Statistics
– Price Group
– Customer Pricing Procedure
– Price List Type
– Customer Statistical Group

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 479

Customer Master
Sales and Distribution – Shipping

• Shipping
– Delivery Priority
– Shipping Conditions
– Delivering Plant
– Order Combination
• Partial Delivery
– Complete Delivery Required By Law
– Partial Delivery per Item
– Max Part Deliveries
– Under/Over delivery Tolerances
• General Transportation Data
– Transportation Zone
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 480

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 160


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Master
Sales and Distribution – Billing

• Billing Section
– Subs. Invoice Processing
– Rebate
– Price Determination
– Invoicing Dates
• Delivery and Payment Terms
– Incoterms
– Payment Terms
• Accounting
– Account Assignment Group
• Taxes
– Tax Classification
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 481

Customer Master
Sales and Distribution – Partner Functions

• Partner Functions
– Partner Function (PF)
– Number
– Partner Description

• Sample Listing of Partner Functions Types


• SP – Sold-to-party
• BP – Bill-to-party
• PY – Payer
• SH – Ship-to-party

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 482

Business Partners

• Defines all of the parties involved in a business


transaction
• Differentiates between their roles
– Customer
– Carrier
– Employees
– Etc.

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 483

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 161


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Partners

• The system will automatically assign a business


partner to the customer master and to any
transaction
• There are four default business partner
– Sold-to
– Ship-to
– Bill-to
– Payer
• They may be the same or different.
• More business partners can be added to carry
out additional business transactions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 484

Customer Account Group

• Customer masters are assigned to a customer


account group
• Through field status maintenance, account
groups can be setup for one-time customers,
regional customers, internal …
• The customer account group controls both type
and number range assignment for customers

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 485

Field Status

• Field status controls the use of each field within


the customer master determining whether a
field is required, optional, suppressed or display
only
• Field status controls are also relevant to a
specific activity — create, change, or display

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 486

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 162


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Partners
Sold-to Party

• Customer who orders Sold-to


• Can default for all partner
functions — sold-to, ship-to,
payer, bill-to Ship-to
• Primary type of business
partner
• Independent and cannot be Bill-to
linked to other sold-to
partners Payer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 487

Business Partners
Ship-to Party

Sold-to
• Receive delivery
• Can be linked to more Ship-to
than one sold-to address

Bill-to

Payer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 488

Business Partners
Bill-to Party

Sold-to

Ship-to
• Partner who is delivered
the invoice
• Can be linked to more Bill-to
than one sold-to address

Payer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 489

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 163


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Business Partners
Payer

Sold-to

Ship-to

• Partner who pays the bill Bill-to


• Can be linked to more
than one sold-to address Payer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 490

Single and Multiple


Ship-to Parties

Sold-to: 10
Single ship-to
Ship-to: 10 Bill-to: 10 Payer: 10

Multiple ship-to’s
Sold-to: 10
Single payer
Ship-to: 11 Ship-to: 10 Bill-to: 10 Payer: 10

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 491

Business Partners

Sold-to Sold-to

Ship-to Bill-to Ship-to

Ship-to Payer Ship-to

Ship-to Ship-to

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 492

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 164


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 15, Group 2 – Exercises

130. Review Sold-to, Ship-to, and Bill-to Account


Groups
131. Create Customer
132. Create Ship-to Party
133. Assign Ship-to Party to Customer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 493

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 494

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 495

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 165


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 16
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Master Data -

Business Process Integration


Master
Data

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 497

Master Data

• Master Data is relatively fixed


– Material Master Data
– Vendor Master Data
– Purchasing Information Record
– General Ledger Master Data
• Before making the Master Data configurations,
you must have completely defined the
organizational structures

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 498

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 166


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 499

Master Data Core Elements

Customer

Master
Data

Material Pricing

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 500

Pricing

• Highly touted “World-class” functionality


• Very easily tailored to meet business needs
• A very robust module in SAP
• Gross to net pricing for material

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 501

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 167


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Standard Pricing Process

• Standard Pricing
– Calculates the gross price
– Then applies
– Discounts
– Surcharges
– Applicable Taxes
– Calculates the final price

• Final price = gross price - discounts +


surcharges + taxes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 502

Cost-Plus Pricing Process

• Cost-plus pricing
– Captures the base cost
– Then applies
– Markup
– Discounts
– Surcharges
– Applicable Taxes
– Calculates the final price

• Final price = cost + markup - discounts +


surcharges + taxes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 503

Pricing Components

• Pricing uses tables to match the condition of


order to the applicable pricing routine
• These routines can
– Add/Subtract amounts, percentages
– Give dollar, weight, quantity breaks/additions
– Accrue

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 504

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 168


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Pricing Procedure

• Pricing uses one of possibly many procedures


based upon
– Item
– Customer
– Order type
– Sales Area
• The procedure will then apply
– Prices (Gross)
– Discounts & Surcharges
– Freight
– Taxes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 505

Pricing Procedure – (continued)

• Pricing conditions for each item on the order


• Pricing condition uses
– Pricing procedure
– Access sequence
– Conditions type
• Determines adjustments and price

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 506

Pricing Process

Line Item in
Sales Order PPEN000
Doc. Pric. Cus. Pric.
Sales Area
Pricing Procedure Proc. Proc.
S000-RE-01
Determination OR=A 43 = 1
Pricing Procedure = RVAJUS
Pricing Procedure
Contains List of Condition Type PR00 = Price
Condition Types
Condition Types Access Sequence PR02 = Price
Point to 10 – Customer/material
Access Sequence 20 – Price list cat./currency/material
30 – Material
Access Sequence
Provides the Search 30 – Material Price = $9.50
Order for Pricing
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 507

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 169


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Pricing Process
Line Pricing CTyp Access Seq. Cond. Tbls.
Item Proced. points to points to contain the
Det. Access Seq. Cond. Tbls. Item Pricing

Sales Area PR00 PR02 Cust. / Mat. N/A


PPEN000 Doc. PP Points to Points to Price List / Cur / N/A
Cust. PP PR02 Cond. Tables Mat. Material $ 9.50

Sales Dist. Doc. Cust. Price


Div
Org. Chan. PP PP Prod.
0001 01 01 A 1 RVAA01
0001 01 01 A 2 RVAB01
0001 01 01 B 1 RVWIA1
0001 01 01 C 1 RVCA01
S000 RE 01 A 1 RVAJUS
S000 WH 01 A 1 RVAJUS

Price Acces Access Access


Prod. Ctyp Description seq. Seq. No. Description
RVAJUS PR00 Price PR02 PR02 10 Customer/material with release status
PB00 Price (Gross) 20 Price list cat./cur/mat with rel status
KA00 Sales deal K305 30 Material with release status
K007 Customer Discount K307 K305 10 Customer/material with release status
K004 Material K304 K307 10 Customer with Release Status
K005 Customer/Material K305 K304 10 Material with release status
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 508

Price Agreements

• Standard price • Detailed price


agreements agreements
– Product – Pricing scales
– Customer – Rebates
– Customer & material – Customer expected
– Customer group & price
material group

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 509

Credit Limits and Checking

• Define automatic credit limit checks to your


company’s requirements
• You can also define at what point the system
carries out these checks (order, delivery, goods
issue, and so on)
• A credit representative is automatically alerted
to a customer’s critical credit situation as soon
as order processing starts
• Employees can be automatically notified of
critical credit situations via internal mail
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 510

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 170


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Credit Limits and Checking – (continued)

• Credit representatives are able to check a


customer’s credit situation to decide whether the
customer should be granted credit
• Works in distributed systems
– Central financial accounting
– Non-central sales and distribution on several sales
and distribution computers

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 511

Credit Check

• You can use this function at any time within


service processing to call up information about
the current credit status of a customer
• Credit limit can be checked manually or
automatically
• The system generally checks the planned costs
without tax
• If a customer has exceeded their credit limit, the
system issues a warning

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 512

Credit Check – (continued)

• The checks can be carried out at various times


during the sales order cycle, from order receipt
to delivery
• You can define a credit check for any valid
combination of the following data:
• Risk category
• Document credit group
• Credit control area

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 513

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 171


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 16 – Exercises

134. Create Material Prices


135. Create Customer Specific Material Price
136. Create Customer Discount
137. Establish Credit Limit for Customer

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 514

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 515

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 516

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 172


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 17
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Rules -

Business Process Integration


Rules

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 518

Rules

• Defines the parameters for Master Data and


Transactions
• Determines functionality for Master Data and
Transactions
• Relatively fixed
• Changes as policy changes

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 519

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 173


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 520

Assign Sales Area to Pricing


Procedure

Pricing Procedure Assignment uses the


combination of:
• Sales Area
• Document Pricing Procedure
• Customer Pricing Procedure

Each combination of these has a pricing procedure


assigned

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 521

Availability Check

• In determining the material availability date the


system can include specific stocks if selected,
such as:
– Safety stock
– Stock in transfer
– Quality inspection stock
– Blocked stock
– Restricted use stock
– All movements of stock

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 522

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 174


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Credit Checking

• Static Credit Limit Check


– Open Orders
– Open Deliveries
– Open Billing documents
– Open Items (accounts receivable)
• Dynamic credit limit with credit horizon check
(future dates)
• Credit check to maximum document value (per
order)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 523

Shipping Functions

• Shipping Point Determination


– The shipping point is selected for each line item
based on the shipping point determination process
– Shipping point based on:
– Shipping condition
– Loading group
– Delivering plant

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 524

Shipping Functions – (continued)

• Route Definition
– Delivery method and the transit time
– ‘Dummy’ routes can be used to easily define transit
time
• Route Determination
– Proposed route is chosen using
– Shipping point
– Destination country
– Transportation zone
– Shipping condition

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 525

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 175


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Revenue Assignment Determination

• Transfers billing values from the Sales and


Distribution to Finance
• Used to recognize revenue
• Keys used to allocate revenue to the proper
account

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 526

Automatic Account Assignment

• Defines the G/L accounts that billing entries are


posted to — revenue, sales deductions,
surcharges, freight charges, etc.
Condition Chart of Sales Customer Account General Ledger
Application Type Accounts Organization Account Group Key Account

V KOFI C001 S001 01 ERL 600999

Sales Condition Sales Sales Customer Pricing Chart of


Tables Document Document Master Procedure Accounts

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 527

Unit 17 – Exercises

138. Assign Sales Areas to Pricing Procedure


139. Define Availability Check for Sales Orders
140. Assign Sales Document to Credit Check
141. Create Shipping Point Determination
142. Create Revenue Account Assignment Key
143. Check Stock Status

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 528

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 176


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 18
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 530

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 531

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 177


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 532

Document Types

Inquiry Quotation Returns Contract

Scheduling
Sales Order Cash Sales Consignment
Agreement

Returnable Credit
Rush Order Debit Memo
Packaging Memo

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 533

Order Processing Functionality

• Delivery scheduling
• Availability check
• Transfer of requirements to Material
Requirements Planning
• Pricing
• Credit check
• Shipping point and route determination
• Foreign trade and license processing
• Document flow

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 534

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 178


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Delivery Scheduling

• Automatic scheduling of essential shipping


activities
• Calculated using defined activity times
• Resulting in scheduled activity dates
• Determined using backward and forward
scheduling rules

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 535

Delivery Scheduling – (continued)

• Structure of sales documents


Header
Line Item # 1
Schedule Line # 1
Schedule Line # 2
Line Item # 2
Schedule Line # 1

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 536

Delivery Scheduling Terminology

• Transportation lead time


– Time required to schedule transportation
• Pick/Pack time
– Time required for picking and packing
• Load time
– Time required to load
• Transit time
– Time required to transport goods from shipping point
to ship-to

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 537

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 179


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Backward Scheduling

Order Material Transp. Goods Requested


Date Availability Sched. Loading Issue Delv. Date
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

Transp. Loading Transit


Pick & Pack
Sched. Time Time
Time (2 days)
(2 days) Time (1 day)
(1 day)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 538

Forward Scheduling

Requested New
Order Material Transp. Goods Delv. Delv.
Date Loading Issue Date Date
Availability Sched.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th
Transp. Loading Transit
Pick & Pack Sched. Time Time
Time (2 days) Time (1 day) (2 days)
(1 day)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 539

Availability Check

• Determines the material availability date


• Considers inward and outward movement of
inventory — customizable
• Influences partial deliveries by
– Proposing a quantity that can be delivered on the
requested date (complete delivery)
– Determines earliest date for full delivery
– Determines the number and dates for partial
deliveries to fulfill the order

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 540

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 180


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Availability Check – (continued)

• In determining the material availability date the


system can include specific stocks if selected,
such as:
– Safety stock
– Stock in transfer
– Quality inspection stock
– Blocked stock
– Restricted use stock
– All movements of stock

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 541

Transfer Requirements to
Material Requirements Planning

• Ordered quantities are passed to Material


Requirements Planning
• Controlled by the schedule line category
• Blocking of documents can affect requirements
passing — delivery block

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 542

Pricing

• Highly touted “world-class” functionality


• Very easily tailored to meet business needs
• A very robust module in SAP
• Gross to net pricing for material

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 543

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 181


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Credit Check

• Efficient means to implement credit


management
• Integrated with Financial Accounting (FI) -- Via
credit control area
• Automatically alerts when a credit check fails
• Comprehensive credit management reporting

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 544

Shipping Point and Route


Determination

• A shipping point is determined for each line item


— shipping point determination
• A delivery can only be processed from one
shipping point
• Routes - route to be traveled & transit time are
determined using customized rules
• Routes can be used to simply define transit time

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 545

Foreign Trade and License Processing

• Predefined trade areas — NAFTA, EU


• Automated reporting for trade areas
• Automated controls
– License management
– Embargo lists
– Control by customer, country, product, point in time

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 546

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 182


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Document Flow

• The document flow feature allows you to find the


status of an order at any point in time. The SAP
system updated the order status every time a
change is made to any of the documents created
in the customer order management cycle (Order
to Cash).

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 547

Unit 18 – Exercises

144. Create Sales Order


145. Check Stock Status
146. Create Delivery Note for Sales Order
147. Check Stock Status
148. Pick Materials on Delivery Note
149. Post Goods Issue
150. Check Stock Status
151. Bill Customer
152. Post Receipt of Customer Payment
153. Review Document Flow

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 548

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 549

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 183


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 19
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 551

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional
data is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 552

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 184


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 553

Material Listing and Exclusion

• Inclusions or exclusions (availability) of material


for a customer or a customer group
• Material Listing — products that can be sold
• Material Exclusion — products that cannot be
sold

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 554

Product Substitution Material


Determination

• Substitution of materials during sales order


processing
– Automatic
– Manual
• Examples:
– Substitute a standard product with an appropriate
replacement material
– Substitute based on a customer preference
– Substitute based on selection list (manual)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 555

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 185


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Material Info Record

• Data on a material defined for one specific


customer is stored in the customer material
information records
– Customer-specific material number
– Customer-specific material description
– Customer-specific data on deliveries and delivery
tolerances

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 556

Unit 19 – Exercises

154. Create Customer Material Info Record


155. Create Sales Order Using Customer Info
Record
156. Create Delivery Note for Sales Order
157. Pick Materials on Delivery Note
158. Post Goods Issue
159. Bill Customer
160. Post Receipt of Customer Payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 557

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 558

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 186


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 20
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 560

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 561

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 187


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 562

Scheduling Agreements

• Defines specific product quantities and delivery


dates for a customer
• Schedule lines and processed through standard
delivery processing
• Availability check is performed during creation
and quantities are passed to MRP
• System automatically updates delivered
quantities

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 563

Scheduling Agreements
(continued)

Scheduling
Agreement Delivery
02/10 150
Date Qty Delivery
02/15 150 05/10 150
05/15 150 Delivery
08/15 150 08/10 150
11/15 300
Delivery
11/10 300

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 564

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 188


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 20 – Exercises

161. Create Scheduling Agreement


162. Process Deliveries for a Scheduling
Agreement
163. Display Scheduling Agreement
164. Check Stock Status
165. Bill Customer
166. Run Customer Credit Check
167. Post Receipt of Customer Payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 565

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 566

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 567

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 189


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 21
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

FI MM SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 569

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 570

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 190


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 571

Item Proposal

• Frequently occurring combinations of material


and quantities used by a customer
• System can suggest the item proposal during
order entry
• Transferred into a sales order document
• Selected from a selection list
• Can be assigned to more than one customer
master records

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 572

Unit 21 – Exercises

168. Create Item Proposal


169. Assign Item Proposal to Customer
170. Create Sales Order Using Item Proposal
171. Create Sales Order Value Discount
172. Run Material Requirements Planning
173. Create Purchasing Information Record for PPEN
174. Assign Source of Supply
175. Create Purchase Order via Requisition
Assignment List
176. Create Goods Receipt
177. Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor
178. Post Payment to Vendor

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 573

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 191


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 22
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

FI MM SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 575

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 576

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 192


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 577

Shipping Overview

• Comprehensive functionality to support picking,


packing and loading functions
• Work list and deadline monitoring
• Functions with backorder processing
• Tightly coupled to the MM and FI modules
• Facility for transportation management

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 578

Shipping Overview – (continued)

Order 1 Order 4 Order 5

Order 2 Delivery 8…13 Delivery 8…16

Order 3 Delivery 8…14

Delivery 8…12 Delivery 8…15

Order Partial Complete


Combination Delivery Delivery
January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 579

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 193


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Shipping Overview – (continued)

• Delivery creation activities


– checks order and materials to determine if a delivery
is possible
– delivery block, incompleteness
– confirms availability
– confirms export/foreign trade requirements
– determines total weight & volume

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 580

Shipping Overview – (continued)

• Delivery creation activities


– generates packing proposal
– considers partial deliveries
– updates route assignment
– assigns picking location
– determines lot batches
– updates sales order: status, delivery qty

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 581

Delivery Notes

• Initiates the delivery process


• Control mechanism for the process
• Changes to delivery are allowable - products,
quantities

Picking Each step in


the delivery
Delivery Packing process
Note Loading updates the
delivery
Post Goods Issue note status

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 582

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 194


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Delivery Due List

• Produces a work-list of deliveries


• Encompasses deliveries and transfers
• Can be scheduled to run in batch
• Automatically combines deliveries

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 583

Picking

• Quantities based on delivery


• Assigned date when picking should begin
• Automated storage location assignment
• Supports serial number tracking and batch
management
• Integrated with Warehouse Management (WM)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 584

Packing

• Identifies which packaging is to be used for


specified products
• Identifies and updates accounts associated with
returnable packaging
• Tracks the packed product by container
• Insures weight/volume restrictions are enforced

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 585

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 195


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Goods Issue

• Event that indicates the change in ownership of


the products
• Reduces inventory
• Automatically updates the G/L accounts
• Ends the shipping process and prevents
changes to the shipping documents

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 586

Goods Issue – (continued)

General Ledger
Cost of Goods Sold Inventory
Debit Credit Debit Credit

1000 1000

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 587

Unit 22, Group 1 – Exercises

179. Run Delivery Due List


180. Pick Materials on Delivery Note
181. Post Goods Issue

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 588

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 196


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Billing Overview

• Automated invoicing based on sales orders


and/or deliveries
• Functionality for processing credit/debit memos
and rebates
• Integration with Financial Accounting (FI) and
Controlling (CO)
• Updates customer’s credit data
• Can create pro forma invoices

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 589

Billing Overview – (continued)

Sales Invoice

Sold To: General Ledger Account Assignment


Rushmore Group

Sales Org: S001


Dist Channel: RE Customer A/R Recon Revenue
Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit
Division: 01
500 500 500
Conditions/Price:
$500

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 590

Billing Methods

Delivery 8…20 Invoice 9…45


Delivery based Order 6
Invoicing Delivery 8…21 Invoice 9…46

Delivery 8…33
Collective Order 9
Delivery 8…34 Invoice 9…68
Invoicing
Order 14 Delivery 8…56

Invoice 9…91
Split
Order 32 Delivery 8…86
Invoicing
Invoice 9…92

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 591

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 197


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Billing Plans

• Periodic — total amount for a planned billing


period
• Milestone — distributing the total amount over
multiple billing dates - typically used with the
project system (PS)
• Installment — evenly proportioned amounts and
defined payment dates
• Resource related — consumed resources such
as service or consulting

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 592

Billing Documents

• Explicitly specify documents


• Billing due list — builds a work list of invoices
that should be generated
• Automatic posting to Financial Accounting (FI)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 593

Unit 22, Group 2 – Exercises

182. Run Billing Due List, Invoice Customers


183. Post Receipt of Customer Payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 594

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 198


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 23
Sales and Distribution
(SD)

- Transactions -

Business Process Integration

FI MM SD

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 596

Transaction Data

• Includes internal and external exchanges that


describe business activities
• Unlike master data, aggregate transactional data
is dynamic – each transaction is unique

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 597

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 199


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Sales and Distribution (SD)

SD FI
Sales and Financial
Distribution Accounting
MM CO
Materials Controlling
PP Mgmt.
Production
SM Planning
R/3 AM
Fixed Assets
Mgmt. EC
Service Client / Server Enterprise
Mgmt. Controlling
QM Integrated Business PS
Quality
Project
Mgmt.
PM Solution WF System
Plant Maintenance Workflow
HR IS
Human Industry
Resources Solutions

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 598

Customer Return

Delivery
Customer Return Note
Order received

Goods
Receipt
Payment
to Customer

Quality
Create
Credit Memo Inspection

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 599

Customer Return – (continued)

1 Order 14 Delivery 8…56 Invoice 9…68

Quality
2 Return Order Return Delivery
Inspection
Return to Inventory

3 Credit Memo Payment

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 600

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 200


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Customer Return – (continued)

• Returns document
– Billing block can be proposed
– Use the Order reason field to identify the reason for
the return
– Full access to pricing and ability to re-price
• Return delivery
– Issues a goods receipt to place material into
inventory

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 601

Customer Return – (continued)

• Credit memo
– Billing block must be cleared from Return
– Posts to Financial Accounting (FI)
– Can be processed in batch (background)
– Can be processed collectively (grouped)

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 602

Unit 23, Group 1 – Exercises

184. Create Goods Return Order


185. Create Delivery Note for Return Order
186. Receive Materials from Goods Return Order
187. Check Document Flow
188. Review Stock Overview

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 603

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 201


ECC 6.0 January 2008

Unit 23, Group 2 – Exercises

189. Transfer Returned Stock to Unrestricted Use


190. Post Customer Credit
191. Create Billing Document
192. Release Billing Document to Accounting
193. Check Document Flow
194. Post Payment of Customer Refund
195. Check Document Flow

January 2008 © SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 604

The End!

© SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC 2008 202


mySAP PLM

mySAP mySAP mySAP


SRM ERP ECC 6.0 CRM

mySAP SCM

SAP NetWeaver

Business Process Integration – I


Exercises
(ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008)

ECC 6.0 – January 2008 © 2008 SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC
ECC 6.0 – January 2008 © 2008 SAP AG and The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 2: Customer Order Management Business Cycle Including


Procurement Process for Replenishment of Goods

Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 2 is to demonstrate the Customer Order Management Business Cycle beginning
with a quotation and ending with recording final payment received from the customer. This process will
include the procurement cycle as you will need to procure the items for sale.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 1 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 1: Logging on to the SAP System


Enter the following:

¾ Select server name provided by the course lead

¾ Click on

¾ Client number provided by course lead

¾ User ID (e.g., User-100) provided by course


lead
¾ Password (e.g., init) provided by course lead

¾ Select EN as the language

¾ (Enter)
Once you have pressed enter, the system will prompt you to change your password the first time you log
on to the system.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 2 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

The following pop-up screen will appear.

Enter your new password

Repeat your new password

Select (Enter)

This will log you onto the system. The following page is a screen shot of the SAP Easy Access Menu you
should see if you have been successful.

If you can not get logged on to the system, please notify the course instructor.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 3 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

This is the SAP Easy Access Menu. It is from here that most all of your exercises will begin.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 4 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 2: Create Vendor Master


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →
Central → Create

Trans Code XK01

Enter the following:

¾ Leave vendor field blank


¾ Company code: C999
¾ Purchasing organization: P999
¾ Account Group: KRED

Reference
¾ Vendor: 100001
¾ Company Code: C999
¾ Purch. Organization: P999

¾ (Enter)

Name
¾ Enter the vendor’s name Your Name _ _ _
Search term
¾ Search term = _ _ _(Your Student Number)
Address
¾ Postal code = 57069
¾ City = Vermillion
¾ Country = US
¾ Region = SD
Communication
¾ Language = English

¾ (Enter)
Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…
Create Vendor: Control N/A

¾ (Enter)

Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A

¾ (Enter)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 5 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting


¾ Rec. Account = 300999

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting
¾ Payt = 0001
¾ Select Check double inv.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Purchasing data
¾ Order Currency = USD
¾ Terms of Payment = 0001

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Partner Functions N/A

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)
Record the Vendor Number: _______________

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 6 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 3: Create Material Master


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →
Create (Special) → Trading Goods

Trans Code MMH1

Enter the following information:


System Menu: Defaults → Industry sectors…

¾ Select: Retail

¾ Check Hide industry sector

¾ (Enter)

System Menu: Default→ Views…


¾ Select the views: Basic data 1
Sales: Sales Org. Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 2
Sales: General/Plant Data
Purchasing
MRP 1, MRP 2, MRP 3
General Plant Data/Storage 1
Accounting 1

Make sure these are checked

¾ (Enter)

System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…


¾ Select:
Company code: C999 C999
Plant: P999 P999
Sales org: S999 S999
Distribution channel: RE RE

Make sure this is checked

¾ (Enter)

¾ Material SPEN_ _ _

¾ Change Number: Leave Blank

¾ Copy from… Material: SPEN999

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 7 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ (Enter)

Basic data 1 TAB


¾ Change Name of Material from Stick Pen 999 to Stick Pen _ _ _

¾ (Enter)

Sales: Sales Org. 1 TAB


Information will be defaulted into the correct fields with the exception of the pricing data. To input the
pricing data:

¾ Select

In the Screen: Create pricing conditions (PR00) Scale


Enter the following:
¾ Scale quantity: 1
¾ Amount: 2.00

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 8 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 4: Create Customer Master


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partner →
Customer → Create → Complete

Trans Code XD01

Enter the following information:

¾ Account group: Sold-to party


¾ Customer: (Leave blank)

¾ Company code: C999

¾ Sales organization: S999


¾ Distribution channel: RE
¾ Division: 01

¾ Customer: 1
¾ Company code: C999
¾ Sales organization: S999
¾ Distribution channel: RE
¾ Reference division: 01

¾ (Enter)

You will create the following customer:

Address TAB
Name
¾ Name: Customer _ _ _
Search term
¾ Search Term: ___
Address
¾ Postal Code: 57069
¾ City: Vermillion
¾ Country: US
¾ Region: SD

Communication
¾ Language: English

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 9 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Select (Financial Accounting)


Account Management TAB
¾ Rec. Account: 110999
¾ Sort key: 001

Payment transactions TAB


¾ Terms of payment: 0001

¾ Select

Sales TAB
Sales order
¾ Currency: USD

Pricing/statistics
¾ Cust. Pric. Proc.: 1
¾ Cust. Stats. Grp: 1

Shipping TAB
Shipping
¾ Delivery priority: 02
¾ Order Combination: Selected
¾ Shipping Conditions: 01
¾ Delivering Plant: P999
Partial deliveries
¾ Max.part.deliveries: 3

Billing Document TAB


Delivery and payment terms
¾ Incoterms: FOB, Origin Shipping Dock
¾ Payment terms: 0001
Accounting
¾ Account Assign Group: 01
Accounting
¾ Tax Classification:
o UTX2 0
o UTX3 0
o UTXJ 0

¾ (Save)

¾ Record Customer Number ________________________

¾ (Cancel) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 10 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 5: Create Customer Quotation


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Quotation → Create

Trans Code VA21

Enter the following information:

¾ Quotation type: QT

Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization: S999
¾ Distribution channel: RE
¾ Division: 01

¾ (Enter)
The ‘Item Overview’ screen of the quotation appears.
Enter the following information:
¾ Quotation: Leave blank (system assigns number)
¾ Sold-to party: Number from Creating a Customer
¾ Ship-to party: Leave blank
¾ PO number: Any number or text

Item overview Tab


¾ Valid to date: Date = one month ahead of today’s date
¾ Material: SPEN_ _ _
¾ Order quantity: 150

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record Quotation Number: _______________________

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 11 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 6: Create Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Trans Code VA01

Enter the following information:

¾ Order type: OR

Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization: S999
¾ Distribution channel: RE
¾ Division: 01

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Note that the system defaults to the Quotation Tab. Enter the number of the quotation created in the
previous exercise.

¾ Select
The system copies the details of the quotation into the Sales order.

Select the option that gives you a complete delivery on the proposed date.

¾ PO Number: 123-_ _ _
¾ PO Date: Today’s date

Sales Tab
¾ Delivering plant P999

¾ (Enter) Enter through any warnings


Record the Net Value of the Sales Order: _____________________

¾ (Save)

Record Order Number: _________________________

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 12 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 7: Check Stock Status


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code MMBE

Enter the following information:

¾ Material: SPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant: P999
¾ Display version: 1

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the Company Code line in the display.

¾ Select
¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.
¾ Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type
¾ Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Company Code
Stock Type Stock
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 13 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 8: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item, Single


Level
Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management →
Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) → MRP → Planning →
Single-Item, Single-Level

Trans Code MD03

Enter the following information:

¾ Enter material number: SPEN_ _ _


¾ Enter plant: P999

MRP control parameters


¾ Processing key: NETCH
¾ Create pur. req.: 2
¾ Deliv. schedule: 3
¾ Create MRP list: 1
¾ Planning mode: 1
¾ Scheduling: 1

Process control parameters


¾ Select Display results before they are saved

¾ (Enter)
¾ A warning message appears - please check input parameters

¾ (Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message

¾ Review the MRP list

Note: Your MRP list may appear different depending on dates and orders.

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 14 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 9: Convert Purchase Requisition to Purchase Order


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management →
Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) → MRP → Evaluations →
Stock/Reqmts List

Trans Code MD04

Enter the following information:

Individual access Tab


¾ Material: SPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant: P999

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select Purchase Requisition to be converted and click (Details of Element)
¾ or Double click on the purchase req to be converted.
¾ Click on the button

¾ Enter Vendor (From the Vendor you created – 100???)

Org. Data Tab


¾ Purch. Org. P999
¾ Purch Group 999
¾ Company Code C999

¾ (Enter)
¾ Single Click on Open Requisitions line in the left window

¾ Then Select (Adopt)

¾ Enter a Net Price: 1.25


¾ Increase the PO quantity to: 1000

¾ (Enter)

¾ Record the amount of the purchase order from the Conditions Tab on the Header $ _____________

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 15 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the new purchase order number._____________________

¾ Select the (Refresh) button to refresh the Stock/Reqmts List


¾ Notice the MRP elements change from the old PurReq to display the new POitem.

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 16 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 10: Create Goods Receipt


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)

Trans Code MIGO_GR

Enter the following information:

¾ Enter your PO # 4500000???

¾ (Execute)

¾ Ensure each line item OK is checked

¾ Enter storage location 10

Notice that the quantity from the PO defaults as the quantity to receive.

¾ Select or (Post)

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 17 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 11: Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →
Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Trans Code MIRO

Enter the following information:

Basic data Tab


¾ Invoice Date: Today's Date
¾ Check your Company Code: C999
¾ Enter amount: Enter amount from invoice
¾ Tax code: XI
¾ PO number: (Enter your purchase order number – 4500000???)

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

¾ (Post)

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 18 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 12: Post Payment to Vendor


Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Outgoing payment→ Post

Trans Code F-53

Enter the following information:

¾ Document date: Today

Bank data:
¾ Account: 100999
¾ Amount: Enter the amount of the outgoing payment from invoice
¾ Text: Invoice Number or other text

Open item selection:


¾ Account: Enter your Vendor # (Created in Exercise 2)
¾ All other settings remain unchanged.

¾ Select

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 19 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Review the balance.

¾ Double click on “USD gross” amount for the Invoice Receipt until “Not assigned” is $0.00

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the document number ______________________

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 20 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 13: Create Delivery Note for Sales Order


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →
With Reference to Sales Order

Trans Code VL01N

Enter the following information:

¾ Shipping point: S999

Sales order data


¾ Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today
¾ Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier

¾ (Enter)
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.

Item Overview Tab


¾ Click on the line item 10

¾ (Item Details)

¾ (Back)

Picking Tab:
Verify system selected:
¾ Plant = P999

Enter the storage location for each item


¾ SLoc = 10

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________


¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 21 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 14: Check Stock Status


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material: SPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant: P999
¾ Display version: 1

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant
Storage Location
Stock Type Stock
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 22 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 15: Picking Materials on Delivery Note


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code VL02N

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ (Enter)
The material delivery quantity is proposed.
Picking Tab
¾ Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity
¾ Verify that the storage location is Inventory

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 23 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 16: Post Goods Issue


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ Select

The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 24 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 17: Check Stock Status


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material: SPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant: P999
¾ Display version: 1

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 25 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 18: Bill Customer


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Trans Code VF01

The system will default the last delivery document created.

¾ (Execute)
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.
¾ Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________

¾ (Save)
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 26 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 19: Post Receipt of Customer Payment


Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Incoming Payments

Trans Code F-28

Enter the following information:

¾ Document Date: Today’s date


¾ Company Code: C999
¾ Currency/Rate: USD

Bank data:
¾ Account: 100999
¾ Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)

Open item selection


¾ Account: Enter Your customer # (Created in Exercise 4)

¾ Select

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 27 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Review the balance.

¾ Double click on “USD gross” amount for the Customer Invoice until “Not assigned” is $0.00

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the document number ______________________

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 28 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 20: Document Flow


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display

Trans Code VA03

¾ Enter your order number.


¾ Select the following from the System Menu: Environment → Display document flow

The system displays a list of documents associated with the order.

¾ Click on the line of the GD goods issue: delvy 49000….###

¾ Select

¾ Select to view the account postings for this goods movement.

¾ (Back) twice to get to the overview screen

It can be seen that the:


1. The entire document flow is shown.
2. There are no open documents.
3. The business cycle is complete.

Note: You can view the document flow from the Sales Order, Delivery or Billing screens.

¾ Click on the line of the Standard Order


¾ Select the

¾ The document flow can be seen in greater detail.

¾ Click on the line of the Outbound Delivery

¾ Select the

¾ (Continue)

¾ (Exit) Twice To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 29 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 3:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 3 is to establish the Organizational Structure for Financial Accounting (FI). Once
the various organizational elements are defined they will need to be assigned. This unit will establish
the core structure necessary to conduct financial transactions within the system.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 30 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 21: Create Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to define a company code. A company code represents a legal
organizational entity and a separate accounting unit in Financial Accounting (FI). This organizational
element is often referred to as a balanced set of books. The company code is the level at which all
accounting transactions are captured.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Financial Accounting →
Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code

Trans Code SPRO

Double click on Edit Company Code Data


Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Company Code = C_ _ _ (where _ _ _ is your student number)
¾ Company Name = (Your Name) Pen Inc. (e.g., John Pen Inc.)
Additional data
¾ City = Vermillion
¾ Country = US
¾ Currency = USD
¾ Language = EN

¾ Select (Address)
Name
¾ Name = (Your Name) Pen Inc. (e.g., John Pen Inc.)
Search Term
¾ Search term = _ _ _ (Your student number)
Address
¾ Street = 123 Forest Avenue
¾ Postal code = 57069
¾ City = Vermillion
¾ Country key = US
¾ Region = SD
¾ (Copy)

¾ (Save)
¾ (Copy)
Record the system message:
Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 31 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 22: Create Chart of Accounts


Purpose of Exercise

The purpose of this exercise is to create a Chart of Accounts. All general ledger accounts for your
company will exist within your Chart of Accounts.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →
Master Data → Preparations → Edit Chart of Accounts List

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Chart of Accts: C_ _ _
¾ Description: Chart of Accounts – Pen Inc_ _ _
General specifications
¾ Maint. Language: English
¾ Length of G/L Account Number: 6
Integration
¾ Controlling integration Manual creation of cost elements

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 32 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 23: Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to your chart of accounts. A company
code can have only one chart of accounts. A chart of accounts can have more that one company code.

If you have several legal entities within your enterprise, it would make sense to have all of the entities
use the same chart of accounts. This would facilitate the creation of consolidated financial statements.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →
Master Data → Preparations → Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your company code C_ _ _
¾ Chrt/Accts C_ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 33 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 24: Assign Company Code to Fiscal Year Variant


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to a fiscal year variant. A fiscal year variant is used
to define the following:
• how many posting periods a fiscal year has
• how many special periods you need
• how the system is to determine the posting periods when posting

When defining your fiscal year, you have the several options:
• Your fiscal year is the calendar year
• Your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year and is not year-dependent
• Your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year and is year-dependent

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Fiscal Year →
Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your Company code C_ _ _
¾ Fiscal Year Variant K1 (Cal. Year, 1 Special Period)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

Please notify your instructor if you encounter problems in saving your entry due to the table
locking mechanism.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 34 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 25: Create Credit Control Area


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create an organizational structure that is used to specify and control
the credit limits for customers.

A credit control area can include one or more company codes. Including more than one company code
in an enterprise allows for the control of a customer’s credit across all company codes assigned to that
credit control area. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one credit control area.
The credit limits must be specified in the same currency for all company codes in a credit control area.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Financial Accounting →
Define Credit Control Area

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Cred. contr. area C_ _ _
¾ Currency USD

¾ (Back)
¾ Description Pen Inc. Credit Control Dept._ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 35 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 26: Assign Company Code to Credit Control Area


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you assign your company code to the credit control area you created to manage your
customers credit limits.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Financial Accounting →
Assign company code to credit control area

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your Company code C_ _ _
¾ CCAr field C_ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 36 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 27: Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
In this activity you can enter additional credit control areas which are allowed for each company code,
in addition to this default credit control area.

The control area assigned to the company code only acts as a default value and is used, for example,
for crediting commitments in the case of non-assignable incoming payments from customers.
Otherwise, with every payment, the credit amount is deducted in the control area in which it was also
added (as previously).

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Account Receivable and Accounts Payable →
Credit Management → Credit Control Account →
Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Credit contr. area C_ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 37 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 4:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 4 is to establish the Organizational Structure for Material Management (MM).
Once the various organizational elements are defined they will need to be assigned. This unit will
establish the core structure necessary to conduct material management transactions within the system.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 38 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 28: Verify Valuation Area


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to verify that the valuation area is set to plant level.

Having the valuation set at the plant level facilitates plant level materials requirements planning.

Navigation
Menu Path:
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →
Define valuation level

Trans Code: SPRO

The defined valuation level is preset at the plant level.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 39 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 29: Define Plant


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will allow you to create a plant. A plant is an organizational structure within our company.

As an organizational structure, the plant is assigned to a company code. However a company code
can have several plants.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →
Define, copy, delete, check plant

Trans Code SPRO

¾ Double click on Define Plant

¾ Click on the button.


Enter the following information:
¾ Plant P_ _ _ (_ _ _ = your student number)

Detailed Information
¾ Factory calendar US
¾ Select (Address)

Name
¾ Name Pen Inc Warehouse_ _ _
¾ Name 2 Plant _ _ _

Search Term
¾ Search term ___

Street Address
¾ Street 123 Glen Avenue
¾ City Vermillion
¾ Postal code 57069
¾ Country key US
¾ Region SD
¾ (Copy)

¾ (Save)
¾ (Copy)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 40 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 30: Define Storage Locations (Inventory and Quality)


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the locations where our inventory will be physically kept.

A storage location is where the quantity of inventory is managed not the value. The value is managed
at the plant level.

A plant can have more than one storage location.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Materials Management →
Maintain storage location

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Continue)

¾ Click on the button.


¾ SLoc 10
¾ Description Inventory
¾ SLoc 20
¾ Description Quality

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 41 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 31: Define Purchasing Organization


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create the Purchasing Organization. The purchasing organization
procures materials and services, negotiates conditions of purchase with vendors, and bears
responsibility for such transactions.

The purchasing organization is the organizational unit that subdivides an enterprise according to the
requirements of purchasing.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Materials Management →
Maintain purchasing organization

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Purch Organization: P_ _ _
¾ Purch. Org. Descr.: Purchasing Org. _ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 42 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 32: Create Purchasing Group


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create a purchasing group. A purchasing organization (such as created in the
previous exercise) can be subdivided into purchasing groups, which consist of buyers responsible for
certain day-to-day purchasing activities (e.g., precious metals, services, etc.).

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Purchasing → Create Purchasing Groups

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Purchasing Group ___
¾ Desc Pur. Grp. Type in Your Name
¾ Tel. No. Pur. Grp 605 555 1414

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 43 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 33: Assign Plant to Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you assign your plant to your company code. This will facilitate the recording or
tracking of transactions at the plant level. Each plant must be assigned to a company code. A plant
can only belong to one company code.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics – General →
Assign plant to company code

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ CoCd (Company Code): C_ _ _
¾ Plnt (Plant): P_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 44 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 34: Assign Purchasing Organization to Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your purchasing organization to your company code. The
assignment can be done differently based on the type of purchasing your organization does. For
example:
• You can assign a purchasing organization to several company codes. This facilitates
corporate-group-wide purchasing.
• You can assign a purchasing organization to one company code. This facilitates company-
specific purchasing.
• You can assign a purchasing organization to no company code. This purchasing organization
can then procure for all plants assigned to it, without regard to the company code to which it
belongs.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Materials Management →
Assign purchasing organization to company code

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your Purchasing Organization
¾ CoCd (Company Code): C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 45 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 35: Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise allows you to assign your purchasing organization to a plant for plant specific purchasing.

A purchasing organization can be assigned to one or more plants.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Materials Management →
Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ POrg (Purchasing Organization): P_ _ _
¾ Plnt (Plant): P_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 46 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 36: Setup Parameter ID


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of exercise is to establish standard default entries for your user ID.

The parameters established in this exercise provide the default information for your transaction
screens. When establishing defaults for your ID, you would generally not want to create default
parameter values for entries that change frequently.

Navigation
Menu Path
System Menu: System → User Profile → Own Data

Trans Code

Select the Parameters tab


Enter the PID and Parameter Value in ALL CAPITALS as the parameter values are case sensitive!
Enter the following Values:
Description (this comes from the
Parameter (PID) Parameter Value Parameter ID and does not need to
be entered by the user)
WRK P_ _ _ Plant
BUK C_ _ _ Company Code
EKG ___ Purchasing Group
EKO P_ _ _ Purchasing Organization
FWS USD Currency Units
GJR 2007 Fiscal Year
KPL C_ _ _ Chart of Accounts

¾ (Enter) to display the short text description

¾ (Save)

Note: This process created a new session – you may close one session if you wish.

Record the system message:


Message

To find the Parameter IDs:


¾ Navigate to the screen that holds the field that requires the parameter and hit F1
¾ Select (Technical information)
¾ Then look for the three digit “Parameter ID” code on the Technical information screen.
¾ Enter this code in the parameter column followed by your most common value for that entry.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 47 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 5:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 5 is to establish some of the Rules (internal controls) for Financial Accounting (FI).
You have established the organizational structure for FI and now you can begin to establish some rules
with regard to the creation and of Master Data and Transactions.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 48 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 37: Create Account Groups


Purpose of Exercise
The account group is a classifying feature within the G/L account master records. The account group
is a required entry.

The account group determines the fields for the entry screens if you create or change a master record
in the company code. In the account group a number range interval is defined to which accounts can
be assigned. Field statuses for each account group control the behavior of the fields when you are
creating a general ledger account such as whether or not the field is required, suppressed, optional, or
display only.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →
Master Data → Preparations → Define Account Group

Trans Code SPRO

Balance Sheet Accounts


¾
¾ Chrt/Accts C_ _ _
¾ Acct Group BS
¾ Name Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ From acct 100000
¾ To account 399999

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select C_ _ _, Group BS – Balance Sheet Accounts 100000 – 399999

¾
¾ Position Cursor on Account Control

¾ (Choose)
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Currency X
Tax category X
Reconciliation account X
Exchange Rate Difference X
Account managed in ext. system X
Only balances in local crcy X
Alternative account number X
Inflation key X
Tolerance group X

¾ (NEXT)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 49 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display


Line Item Management X
Open item management X
Sort key X
Authorization group X
Administrator X

¾ (Next)
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Reconcil.acct ready for input X
Field status group X
Post automatically only X
Supplement automatic postings X

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Income Statement Accounts


¾
¾ Chrt/Accts C_ _ _
¾ Acct Group PL
¾ Name Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ From acct 400000
¾ To account 999999

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select C_ _ _, Group PL – Profit & Loss Accounts 400000 – 999999
¾
¾ Position Cursor on Account Control

¾ (Choose)
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Currency X
Tax category X
Reconciliation account X
Exchange rate difference X
Account managed in ext. system X
Only balances in local crcy X
Alternative account number X
Inflation key X
Tolerance group X

¾ (Next)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 50 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾
Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Line Item Management X
Open item management X
Sort key X
Authorization group X
Administrator X

¾ (Next)
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Reconcil.acct ready for input X
Field status group X
Post automatically only X
Supplement automatic postings X

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Reconciliation Accounts
¾
¾ Chrt/Accts C_ _ _
¾ Acct Group RA
¾ Name Reconciliation Accounts
¾ From acct 110000
¾ To account 310000

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)
¾ Select C_ _ _, Group RA - Reconciliation Accounts 110000 – 300999

¾
¾ Position Cursor on Account Control

¾ (Choose)
Account Control Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Currency X
Tax category X
Reconciliation account X
Exchange rate difference key X
Account managed in ext. system X
Only balances in local crcy X
Alternative account number X
Inflation key X
Tolerance group X
¾ (Next)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 51 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾
Account management Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Line Item Management X
Open item management X
Sort key X
Authorization group X
Administrator (Accounting Clerk) X

¾ (Next)
Document entry Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry Display
Reconcil.acct ready for input X
Field status group X
Post automatically only X
Supplement automatic postings X

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 52 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 38: Define Retained Earnings Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to designate an account as the retained earnings account in financial
accounting. The retained earnings account is tied to a variety of accounts and is used in closing the
fiscal year. At the end of a fiscal year, the system carries forward the balance of the P&L account to
the retained earnings account.

Navigation
Menu Path:
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → General Ledger Accounting → G/L Accounts →
Master Data → Preparations → Define Retained Earnings Account

Trans Code: SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Chart of Accounts C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
P&L statmt Account
RE 330_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

Acknowledge the warning by pressing

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 53 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 39: Review Field Status Variant


Purpose of Exercise
A field status variant groups together several field status groups. You assign a field status variant to
each company code.

The field status group specifies which fields are ready for input, which fields must be filled or which
fields are suppressed when entering documents. Specifying which fields are required, suppressed,
optional, or display only when using the various general ledger accounts. A field status group is
assigned to a general ledger account when it is created.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Line Item → Controls → Define Field Status Variants

Trans Code SPRO

¾ Select VPEN
¾ Double click Field status groups
¾ Select ZALL, All Accounts
¾
¾ Position Cursor on General Data
¾ (Choose)
General Data Suppress Req. entry Opt. entry
Assignment number X
Text X
Invoice Reference X
Hedging X
Collective Invoice X
Reference specification 1/2 X
Reference specification 3 X
Inflation Index X

View fields statuses (Do not change – only review)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 54 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 40: Assign Company Code to Field Status Variant


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your company code to the field status variant you just created.
By doing this you will allow your company code to use the field status variant and the groups that you
created within the variant.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Line Item → Controls → Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Fld stat. var. (Field Status Variant): VPEN

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 55 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 6: Create General Ledger Accounts


Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 6 is to create the General Ledger Accounts necessary for the legal reporting
requirements associated with a Balance Sheet and an Income Statement. This includes:
• Balance Sheet accounts for assets, liabilities and retained earnings
• Income Statement for revenues and expenses
The General Ledger Accounts will be created using the Rules you created in Unit 5:
• BS = Balance Sheet Accounts (Assets and Liabilities)
• PL = Profit & Loss Accounts (Revenues and Expenses)
• RA = Reconciliation Accounts (Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 56 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 41: Create Bank Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your bank account. This is an asset balance
sheet account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 100_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Bank (Checking)
¾ G/L acct long text Bank (Checking Account)

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select: “Line item display”
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 57 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 42: Create Accounts Receivable Reconciliation Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create the Accounts Receivable Reconciliation account. This account is used to sum
up customer accounts. Multiple reconciliation accounts could be used you wanted to keep track of
different customer accounts. This type of account is normally used wherever there is a high volume of
transactions that can be summarized into a single account for reporting on the Balance Sheet. This is
an asset on the Balance Sheet.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 110_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Reconciliation Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: AR Recon
¾ G/L acct long text Accounts Receivable Reconciliation

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Recon. acct for acct type: CUSTOMERS

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 58 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 43: Create Trading Goods Inventory Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your trading goods inventory account. This is an
asset balance sheet account that records the value of the current inventory.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 201_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Inventory - Trading
¾ G/L acct long text Trading Goods Inventory

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select: “Line item display”
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Select “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 59 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 44: Create Operating Supplies Inventory Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your operating supplies inventory account. This
is an asset balance sheet account that records the value of the current inventory.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 203_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Operating Supplies
¾ G/L acct long text Operating Supplies Inventory

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select: “Line item display”
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Select “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 60 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 45: Create Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create the Accounts Payable Reconciliation account. This account is used to sum up
vendor accounts. Multiple reconciliation accounts could be used you wanted to keep track of different
vendor accounts. This type of account is normally used wherever there is a high volume of
transactions that can be summarized into a single account for reporting on the Balance Sheet. This is
a liability on the Balance Sheet.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 300_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Reconciliation Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: AP Recon
¾ G/L acct long text Accounts Payable Reconciliation

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Recon. acct for acct type: VENDORS

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 61 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 46: Create Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt account.
This is a balance sheet account that records the value of a goods receipt from a vendor in the
purchasing process prior to matching it up with and invoice from the vendor.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 310_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: GR/IR Account
¾ G/L acct long text Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Check box Only balances in local currency
¾ Tax category * (All tax types allowed)
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Open Item Management
¾ Check Line item display
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Check “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 62 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 47: Create Output Tax Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your output tax account. This is an asset balance
sheet account that records the value tax that has been accrued in this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 320_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Accrued Tax - Output
¾ G/L acct long text Accrued Tax - Output

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 63 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 48: Create Input Tax Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your input tax account. This is an asset balance
sheet account that records the value tax that has been accrued in this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 321_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Accrued Tax - Input
¾ G/L acct long text Accrued Tax - Input

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 64 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 49: Create Retained Earnings Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will extend this account as well as add additional information to the Retained Earnings
account created when you copied the CPEN accounts into your C_ _ _ Chart of Accounts.

A Retained Earnings account is a Balance Sheet account that records values to be carried forward
from one period to the next.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 330_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Retained Earnings
¾ G/L acct long text Retained Earnings

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select: “Line item display”
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Select “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 65 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 50: Create Common Stock Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create a general ledger account for your common stock account. This is an asset
balance sheet account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 350_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Balance Sheet Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button Balance sheet account

Description
¾ Short text: Common Stock
¾ G/L acct long text Common Stock _ _ _

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select: “Only balances in local currency”

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select: “Line item display”
¾ Sort key: 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 66 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 51: Create Trading Goods Consumption Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Trading Goods Consumption Expense account. This
Income Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 721_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Trading Goods Exp.
¾ G/L acct long text Trading Goods Consumption/Expense

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 67 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 52: Create Operating Supplies Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create an Operating Supplies Expense account. This Income
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 740_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Supplies Expense
¾ G/L acct long text Supplies Expense

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 68 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 53: Create Utilities Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Utilities Expense account. This Income Statement account
will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 750_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Utilities Expense
¾ G/L acct long text Utilities Expense Account

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 69 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 54: Create Purchase Price Difference Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Price Difference Expense account. This Income
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 760_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Pur Price Dif Acct
¾ G/L acct long text Purchase Price Difference Account

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 70 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 55: Create Information Technology Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Information Technology Expense account. This Income
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 770_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: IT Expense
¾ G/L acct long text Information Technology Expense

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 71 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 56: Create Miscellaneous Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Miscellaneous Expense account. This Income Statement
account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 781_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Misc. Expense
¾ G/L acct long text Miscellaneous Expense

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 72 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 57: Create Cost of Goods Sold Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Cost of Goods Sold Expense account. This Income
Statement account will track the expenses that are posted to this account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account: 790_ _ _


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text: Cost of Goods Sold
¾ G/L acct long text Cost of Goods Sold Expense

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Currency USD
¾ Select Posting without tax allowed

Account Management in Company Code


¾ Select Line item display
¾ Sort Key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)
Record the system message:
Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 73 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 58: Run General Ledger List of Accounts Report


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will provide you with a report that summarizes all accounts assigned to your company
code. Use this accounts to verify that you have indeed created all the accounts you needed to create
for your company.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Information System →
General Ledger Reports → Master Data → Chart of Accounts →
SAP Minimal Variant

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Company Code: C_ _ _

¾ (Execute)
¾ Review the list of accounts

Verify details of:


G/L Account Description – Short Text
100_ _ _ Bank (Checking Account)
110_ _ _ Account Receivable Reconciliation
201_ _ _ Trading Goods Inventory
203_ _ _ Operating Supplies Inventory
300_ _ _ Accounts Payable Reconciliation
310_ _ _ Goods Receipt / Invoice Receipt Account
320_ _ _ Accrued Tax – Output
321_ _ _ Accrued Tax – Input
330_ _ _ Retained Earnings
350_ _ _ Common Stock
721_ _ _ Trading Goods Consumption / Expense
740_ _ _ Supplies Expense
750_ _ _ Utilities Expense
760_ _ _ Purchase Price Difference Account
770_ _ _ Information Technology Expense
781_ _ _ Miscellaneous Expense
790_ _ _ Cost of Goods Sold Expense

¾ (Back)

¾ (Exit)
Record the system message:
Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 74 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 7
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 7 is to create the Rules (internal controls) and Master Data necessary for Material
Management. This includes:
• Rules that control how master data is created and how master data responds when used in
transactions.
• Master Data
o Vendor Master Data – who you buy from
o Material Master Data – what you buy

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 75 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 59: Vendor Account Groups


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise is to have you review the different account groups that you will use to create your
vendors. Account groups control the data required to create vendors just as the account groups you
created for general ledger accounts controlled the information required to create general ledger
accounts.

This is a review only exercise (Do not change or save).

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →
Vendor Accounts → Master Data →
Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data →
Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors)

Trans Code SPRO

System Menu: Table View Æ Change-->Display

¾ Select KRED - Vendor (int.number assgnmnt)

¾ (Details)
¾ Select General Data
¾ Select
¾ Review the required fields by double clicking on the various groups

DO NOT CHANGE ANY FIELDS


¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 76 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 60: Create Vendor Master Accounting Record


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create the general and financial views of a vendor master record. Business
transactions are posted to accounts and managed using those accounts. A master record must be
created for each account that you require. Vendor master records have three primary views:
• General Data
• Financial Accounting Data – often referred to as company code data and
• Purchasing Data
The master record can be created by financial accounting or purchasing. The record can be created
with only that department’s view along with the general view or it can be created centrally if all the
information is known.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records →
Create

Trans Code FK01

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor: Leave blank
¾ Company code C_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Address
Name
¾ Name: Promotions Ltd. _ _ _
Search Term
¾ Search term _ _ _(Your Student Number)
Address
¾ Postal code 95929
¾ City Chico
¾ Country US
¾ Region CA
Communication
¾ Language English

¾ (Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…
Create Vendor: Control N/A

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Payment transaction N/A

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting
¾ Recon. Account: 300_ _ _

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 77 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Payment transaction Accounting
¾ Payt term (Payment Terms): 0001
¾ Select Check double inv.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the vendor number _________________

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 78 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 61: Create Vendor Master Purchasing Record


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create the purchasing view for the vendor master you created in the previous
exercise. Since you have a vendor number, this will be needed to complete the creation of the
purchasing view.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →
Purchasing → Create

Trans Code MK01

Create a purchasing view for your Promotions Ltd _ _ _ vendor.


¾ Vendor Internal # from previous exercise
¾ Purchasing Organization P_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Purchasing Data
Conditions
¾ Order Currency USD
¾ Terms of payment 0001

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 79 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 62: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →
Central → Create

Trans Code XK01

Create all views for a new vendor called Slick Pens _ _ _.


¾ Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Purchasing Organization P_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Address
Name
¾ Name Slick Pens _ _ _
Search Term
¾ Search term _ _ _(Your Student Number)
Address
¾ Postal code 53201
¾ City Milwaukee
¾ Country US
¾ Region WI
Communication
¾ Language English

¾ (Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…
Create Vendor: Control N/A
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A
Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting
¾ Recon. Account = 300_ _ _
Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting
¾ Payment term = 0001
¾ Select Check double inv.
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A
Create Vendor: Purchasing data
¾ Order Currency = USD
¾ Terms of payment = 0001

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the vendor number _________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 80 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 63: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →
Central → Create

Trans Code XK01

Create all views for a new vendor called Premier Pens _ _ _.


¾ Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Purchasing Organization P_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Address
Name
¾ Name Premier Pens _ _ _
Search Term
¾ Search term _ _ _ (Your Student Number)
Address
¾ Postal code 70803
¾ City Baton Rouge
¾ Country US
¾ Region LA
Communication
¾ Language English

¾ (Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…
Create Vendor: Control N/A
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A
Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting
¾ Recon. Account = 300_ _ _
Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting
¾ Payment term = 0001
¾ Select Check double inv.
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A
Create Vendor: Purchasing data
¾ Order Currency = USD
¾ Terms of payment = 0001

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the vendor number _________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 81 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 64: Create Vendor Master Record Centrally


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create all three views of the vendor master (general, financial, and purchasing).

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor →
Central → Create

Trans Code XK01

Create all views for a new vendor called Supply Box _ _ _.


¾ Vendor Leave Blank (system will generate the number)
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Purchasing Organization P_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED.

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Address
Name
¾ Name Boxes Inc _ _ _
Search Term
¾ Search term _ _ _ (Your Student Number)
Address
¾ Postal code 57101
¾ City Sioux Falls
¾ Country US
¾ Region SD
Communication
¾ Language English

¾ (Enter) Note: Page forward past views that do not contain relevant information…
Create Vendor: Control N/A
Create Vendor: Payment transactions N/A
Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting
¾ Recon. Account = 300_ _ _
Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting
¾ Payment term = 0001
¾ Select Check double inv.
Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting N/A
Create Vendor: Purchasing data
¾ Order Currency = USD
¾ Terms of payment = 0001

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the vendor number _________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 82 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 65: Initialize the Fiscal Period for Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to initialize the fiscal period for your company code. This allows for the
movement of materials and will facilitate your ability to conduct transactions. Great care needs to be
utilized when carrying out this exercise.

Note: If you create an initial posting period in the future, no transactions will be possible until that
period. You will then need to start over at the beginning of the exercises.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Logistics – General → Material Master → Basic Settings →
Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information for your Company Code:


¾ Year Current Year (e.g, 2007)
¾ Pe (Period) Enter the current period (1=January; 2=February, etc.)
¾ Select ABp (allow posting to previous period)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 83 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 66: Maintain Plant Parameters for Materials Management


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will specify the plant parameters you will need for material requirements planning.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Consumption-Based Planning → Plant Parameters →
Carry Out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information

¾ Select
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ Select

¾ Select

¾ Select
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ Select
Environment

¾ Select
Number Ranges

¾ Select

¾ Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)

¾ Select

¾ Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)

¾ Select

¾ Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)

¾ Select

¾ Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 84 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Select

¾ Assign no. range 01 to your plant (Save) (Back twice)


Master data

¾ Select

¾ Select
¾ Plant: P_ _ _
¾ MRP controller _ _ _ and description (Your name)

¾ (Save) (Back three times)

¾ Select

¾ Select
¾ Plant P_ _ _
¾ Marg. _ _ _ ( Your Student Number)
¾ Op.Per. 1 (Workdays prior to order start)
¾ Fl Bef 1 (Workdays between order start and scheduled start)
¾ Fl After 1 (Workdays between order due date and scheduled
finish date)
¾ Rel. Per: 1 (Workdays in release period)

¾ (Save) (Back twice)


Planned Orders

¾ Select
¾ Number of planned orders 1

¾ (Save) (Back)

¾ Select
¾ Select your plant
¾ Avail. Check Rule PP

¾ (Save) (Back)
Reporting

¾ Select
¾ Select Display list
¾ Frequency 1

¾ (Save) (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 85 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Planning Run

¾ Select
Plant parameters
¾ Select Scheduling: Info Rec/Agreemt
¾ Schedule lines . 3 (Schedule Lines)
¾ Unknown Acct Assignment U (Unknown)

¾ (Save) (Back two times)

¾ Select
¾ Planning horizon 15

¾ (Save) (Back three times)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 86 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 67: Activate Material Requirements Planning


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise activates Material Requirements Planning for your plant.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Consumption-Based Planning → Planning →
Activate Material Requirements Planning

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Select
¾ Select Activate requirements planning for your plant

¾ (Save) (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 87 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 68: Define Attributes for Material Types


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to define the attributes for the material types. The attributes for a
material type determine the functions allowed for materials of that category (HAWA, HIBE, etc.). Each
material type has specific functions and views required to maintain the data.

Since this is client level configuration is shared by everyone, therefore in this exercise you will only
have to review the settings established by the Instructor.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Logistics – General → Material Master → Basic Settings → Material Types →
Define Attributes of Material Types

Trans Code SPRO

¾ Select HAWA (Training Goods)


¾ Double Click Quantity/value updating

¾ Qty updating Select


¾ Value update Select

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back
Complete the same set of operations for HIBE (Operating Supplies) after you are done with HAWA.

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 88 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 69: Create Material Master for Trading Goods


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the trading good materials that will be necessary for your company.
The Material Master has several views as you saw in the previous exercise when looking at the
material type attributes. The views required are dependent on the type of material and the functionality
required by the company.

This exercise will also introduce you to the use of defaults in the creation of material master data.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →
Create (Special) → Trading Goods

Trans Code MMH1

First set the defaults (you may need to select the industry sector prior to setting the defaults)

¾ Select industry sector Retail

System Menu: Defaults→ Industry Sector Retail

¾ (Enter)

System Menu: Defaults→ Views


¾ Select the following views: Basic data 1
Purchasing
MRP 1
MRP 2
MRP 3
General Plant Data/Storage 1
Accounting 1
(Deselect the Sales Views if selected)

¾ Select Create views selected

¾ (Enter)

System Menu: Default→ Organization levels… Copy from…


Company code: C_ _ _ C_ _ _
Plant: P_ _ _ P_ _ _

¾ Leave storage location blank (storage locations will be created automatically)

¾ (Enter)

Enter the following information to create the materials:

¾ Material BPEN_ _ _

¾ (You may need to press enter once or twice to pass the views and organization level selections
if you did not indicate that you only wanted to view these on request)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 89 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Use the information following table for the inputs into the material master. Repeat the process for each
of the materials.

Use your student number for all entries where _ _ _ is indicated.

Use the following information to create the materials


Material Name BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ Box_ _ _
Basic data 1 View
Description Barrel Pen Click Pen Premium Pen Pen Box
Base Unit of Measure Each (EA) Each (EA) Each (EA) Each (EA)
Material Group 01 01 01 01
Gross & Net Weight / Unit 1 Oz 1 Oz 2 Oz 1 Oz
Purchasing View
Purchasing Group ___ ___ ___ ___
MRP 1 View
MRP Type PD PD PD PD
MRP Controller ___ ___ ___ ___
Lot size EX EX EX EX
Minimum Lot Size 12 12 144
MRP 2 View
Planned Deliv. Time 3 3 6 3
SchedMargin key ___ ___ ___ ___
Safety Stock 500 150 20 500
MRP 3 View
Availability check 02 02 02 02
Accounting 1 View
Value Class 3100 3100 3100 3100
Moving price $ 0.65 $ 1.50 $ 3.00 $ 0.20
Price Unit 1 1 1 1

¾ (Save after each material)

Record the system messages:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 90 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 70: (Optional) Create Material Master for Operating Supplies


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the operating supplies that will be necessary for your company. The
Material Master has several views as you saw in the previous exercise when looking at the material
type attributes. The views required are dependent on the type of material and the functionality required
by the company.

Use the same default information for this exercise that you used when creating the trading good
material master data.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material →
Create (Special) → Operating Supplies

Trans Code MMI1

Enter the following information:

¾ Enter material: TAPE_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
Use the following information to create the materials

Material Tape_ _ _ Tissue _ _ _ Paper_ _ _ Forms_ _ _


Basic data 1 View
Description Tape Tissue Paper Forms
Base Unit of Measure Each (EA) Carton (CAR) Each (EA) Carton (CAR)
Material Group 01 01 01 01
Gross & Net Weight / Unit 8 Oz 1 lb 1 lb 30 lb
Purchasing
Order Unit DZ CV
Conversion factor for U of M 1 = 12 1 = 10
Purchasing Group ___ ___ ___ ___
MRP 1 View
MRP Type PD PD PD VB
Reorder Point 1
MRP Controller ___ ___ ___ ___
Lot size FX EX FX EX
Minimum Lot Size 1 1
Fixed lot size 12 10

Continue on next page…

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 91 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

MRP 2 View
Planned Deliv. Time 1 1 2 5
SchedMargin key ___ ___ ___ ___
Safety Stock 10 10 2 1
MRP 3 View
Availability check 02 02 02 02
Accounting 1 View
Value Class 3030 3030 3030 3030
Moving price $ 9.60 $ 2.50 $ 35.50 $ 52.50
Price Unit 12 1 10 1

¾ (Save after each material)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 92 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 8:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 8 is to establish some of the rules that will control the financial accounting (FI)
transactions. In addition to the rules document number ranges will be established and a payment
program will be established.

Once these rules and other parameters are established you will test your system in the next unit.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 93 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 71: Define Posting Periods Variant


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will define the variant to which the posting period will be assigned. Financial accounting
(FI) posting periods will be opened to allow transactions to be tracked by period. This variant will then
be assigned to your company code.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Posting Periods → Define Variants for Open Posting Periods

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on
¾ Variant V_ _ _
¾ Name Posting Period Variant _ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 94 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 72: Open and Close Posting Periods


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to establish when the posting periods will be effective. In addition to
establishing the open posting periods for financial accounting, you will also define the additional special
closing periods. This will be in accord with the fiscal year variant (K1 – calendar year with 1 special
closing period) you set up earlier.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Posting Periods → Open and Close Posting Periods

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on
¾ Var. V_ _ _
¾ A + (Valid for all accounts)
Leave account columns blank
Open periods 1 to 12 plus one extra period for current fiscal year by typing the following:
¾ From per 1 1
¾ Year 2007
¾ To period 12
¾ Year 2010
¾ From per 2 13
¾ Year 2007
¾ To period 13
¾ Year 2010

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 95 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 73: Assign Posting Period Variant to Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you assign the posting period variant to your company code.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Posting Periods → Assign Variants to Company Code

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


¾ Find your Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Variant V_ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 96 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 74: Create Tolerance Groups for Account Postings


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to set up the tolerances you will use for the entry of financial accounting
(FI) documents. A blank group is a valid tolerance group. By creating a blank group code the system
will apply these rules as defaults unless a specific group is entered resulting in any person not
assigned to another group by default will be assigned to this group

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Line Item → Define Tolerance Groups for Employees

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Group Leave blank
¾ Company code C_ _ _
Upper limits for posting procedures
¾ Amount per document 1,000,000
¾ Amount per open item account item 100,000
¾ Cash discount per line item 5%
Permitted payment differences
¾ Revenue 100 10% 10
¾ Expense 100 10% 10

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 97 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 75: Setup Payment Program


Purpose of Exercise
The payment program allows the company to have flexibility in paying bills.

Example 1
Company code 0001 pays its own items and the items of company codes 0002 and 0003. All items are
grouped into one payment.

Company code Paying company code Sending company code


0001 0001 0001
0002 0001 0001
0003 0001 0001

Example 2
Company code 0001 pays its own items and the items of company codes 0002 and 0003. However, a
separate payment is created for each company code.

Company code Paying company code Sending company code


0001 0001 0001
0002 0001 0002
0003 0001 0003

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →
Business Transactions → Outgoing Payments →
Automatic Outgoing Payments →
Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program →
Setup All Company Codes for Payment Transactions

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Sending company code C_ _ _ (your company code)
¾ Paying company code C_ _ _ (your company code)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 98 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 76: Create Tolerance Groups for Accounts Receivable and


Accounts Payable
Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create tolerance groups that contain rules that affect cash discount and payment
difference processing. These rules become effective during payment entry.

As with earlier tolerances, a blank group field means that these rules will apply to all persons not
assigned to a specific group.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →
Business Transactions → Outgoing Payments → Manual Outgoing Payments →
Define Tolerances (Vendors)

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Tolerance group Leave blank
¾ Tolerance group description DEFAULT _ _ _
Permitted Payment Differences
¾ Gain
o Amount 10
o Percent 1
¾ Loss
o Amount 1
o Percent 1

Specifications for Posting Residual Items from Payment Differences


¾ Select Payment Term from Invoice
¾ Select Only grant partial cash disc

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 99 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 77: Create Financial Accounting (FI) Document Numbers


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to have you establish which number ranges are assigned to the
company code. Each document in the system is unique based on the following:
• Company Code
• Fiscal Year
• Document Number

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Document Number Ranges → Copy to Company Code

Trans Code SPRO

Enter the following information:


Source Company Code Details
¾ Company code US01
Target Company Code Details
¾ Company code C_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ to accept the message.


¾ Review the information

¾ (Back twice)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 100 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 9:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 9 is to post your initial cash investment and conduct and initial test on the system
by posting the purchase of some supplies.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 101 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 78: Review Document Types


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to review the different type of documents you will be using. A document
type is used to; distinguish between different types of business transactions, the document type
controls which account type that you are allowed to post (G/L account, customer, vendor, fixed
assets….), and a document type is assigned to a specific document number range. Below are listed a
few of the document types that we will be using throughout this course.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings → Document →
Document Header → Define Document Types

Trans Code SPRO

¾ (Change -> Display)

Make sure the title of the screen is: Display View “Document Types”; Overview

¾ Select the following document types and record the Document Number Ranges

Review the details of:


Document type Document Document Number Range
DR Customer invoice
DZ Customer payment
KR Vendor invoice
KZ Vendor payment
RE Invoice – Gross
SA G/L account document
WA Goods issue
WE Goods receipt

¾ (Details) list the Documents Number Range in the table above.

¾ (Back twice)
Record the system message:
Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 102 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 79: Post Initial Cash Investment by Owners


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to test your initial FI setup. The business scenario is that you ingest
$750,000 to start up your business. You need to account for this transaction in your Financial
Accounting System.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting→
Enter G/L Account Document

Trans Code FB50

Enter the following information:


Basic data Tab
¾ Document Date Today’s date
¾ Currency USD
¾ Company Code (Your code should default)
On the first line Enter:
¾ G/L acct 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)
¾ D/C Debit
¾ Amount in doc.curr. $ 750,000
On the second line Enter:
¾ G/L acct 350_ _ _ (Common Stock)
¾ D/C Credit
¾ Amount in doc.curr. $ 750,000

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 103 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 80: Post Purchase of Operating Supplies


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to test your initial FI setup. The business scenario is that you need
some office supplies immediately. You drive down to Office Supply Depot and buy $75 of supplies
(paper, folders, etc) and pay for the purchase with a company check.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Posting→
Enter G/L Account Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Basic data Tab
¾ Document Date Today’s date
¾ Currency USD
¾ Company Code (Your code should default)
On the first line Enter:
¾ G/L acct 740_ _ _ (Supplies Expense Account)
¾ D/C Debit
¾ Amount in doc.curr. $ 75
On the second line Enter:
¾ G/L acct 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)
¾ D/C Credit
¾ Amount in doc.curr. $ 75

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (To return to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 104 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 81: Display and Review General Ledger Account Balances


and Individual Line Items
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to Display the General Ledger Account balance and line item.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →
Display Balances

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ G/L Account 100_ _ _
¾ Company code C_ _ _
¾ Fiscal year 2007

¾ (Execute)
¾ Record the entry below

¾ (Back)
¾ G/L Account 350_ _ _

¾ (Execute)
¾ Record the entry below

¾ (Back)
¾ G/L Account 740_ _ _

¾ (Execute)
¾ Record the entry below

Record the balances for the current period


Account Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative
Balance
100_ _ _
350_ _ _
740_ _ _

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 105 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Business Case Scenario


Purpose of Exercise
Pen Inc. has rented more warehouse space and is about to receive the invoice for the first month’s
lease. In order to do this, you must create a new vendor and add an expense account for rent.

Unit 10:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 10 is to test your systems ability to receive invoices from vendors and post
payment to the vendors account.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 106 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 82: Create Vendor Master Record for Landlord


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a new vendor. The Chief Financial Officer has requested you
create a new vendor account for Tanager Leasing – the firm from which you are renting your new office
and warehouse space.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Master Records →
Create

Trans Code FK01

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor Leave blank
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Account group KRED
Reference
¾ Reference (one of your other vendors)
¾ Company code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Address
Name
¾ Name Tanager Leasing _ _ _
Search Term
¾ Search term ___
Street Address
¾ City Vermillion
¾ Postal code 57069
¾ Country US
¾ Region SD
¾ Language EN

¾ (Enter three times)

Create Vendor: Accounting information Accounting


Accounting Information
¾ Recon. account 300_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
Create Vendor: Payment transactions Accounting
Payment data
¾ Payt Terms 0001
¾ Select Chk double inv.

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)
Record the system message:
Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 107 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 83: Create Rent Expense Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create and new expense account for rent in your chart of accounts using a
previous account as a template for the new account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code FS00

Enter the following information:


¾ G/L Account 780_ _ _
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ Click on
¾ G/L Account 781_ _ _
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Continue)
Type/Description TAB
Description
¾ Short Text Rent Expense
¾ G/L Acct Long Text Rent Expense

¾ All other settings remain unchanged.

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 108 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 84: Create Invoice Receipt for Rent Expense


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to log the invoice that Tanager Leasing, Inc. has sent for the first
month’s rent of $1,500.00 total. Please post the invoice using the accounts you have created in your
Company code.

INVOICE # 123 Tanager Leasing, Inc.

CURRENT Month Rent

Total $1,500.00

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Invoice

Trans Code FB60

Enter the following information:

If your Company Code did not default in:


System Menu: Edit → Change Company Code and enter yours.

Basic data Tab


¾ Vendor (# for Tanager Leasing _ _ _)
¾ Invoice date Today
¾ Amount $ 1,500

¾ G/L acct 780_ _ _ (Rent Expense)


¾ D/C Debit
¾ Amount in doc.curr. $ 1,500

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.


Verify details of:
Account Description Amount Comments
100_ _ _ Tanager Leasing 1500-
780_ _ _ Rent Expense 1500

¾ (Post)
Record the system message:
Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (To return to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 109 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 85: Display and Review General Ledger Account Balances


and Individual Line Items
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to display the Rent Expense account balance and line item.

Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →
Display Balances

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ G/L account 780_ _ _
¾ Company code C_ _ _
¾ Fiscal year 2007

¾ (Execute)
¾ Record the information in the ledger below.
¾ Double click on period balance to see individual line items.

Record the balance of the Rent Expense Account for the current and previous period
Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative
Balance

¾ (Exit Twice)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 110 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 86: Display and Review Vendor Account Balances and


Individual Line Items
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to display the Vendor account balance and line item.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting→ Financial accounting→ Accounts Payable→ Account→
Display Balances

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor Vendor # for Tanager Leasing
¾ Company code C_ _ _
¾ Fiscal year 2007

¾ (Execute)
¾ Record the information in the ledger below.
¾ Double click on period balance to see individual line items.

Record the balance of the Vendor Account for the current and previous period
Period Debit Credit Balance Cumulative Sales/
Balance Purchases

¾ (Exit Twice)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 111 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 87: Post Payment to Landlord


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you pay the invoice from Tanager Leasing which is due for payment now. You
are requested to clear the invoice amount by posting an outgoing payment using the bank account of
your chart of accounts.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Outgoing Payment → Post

Trans Code F-53

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
Bank data
¾ Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)
¾ Amount 1500
¾ Text Invoice # 123
Open items selection
¾ Account (Vendor # for Tanager Leasing _ _ _)
¾ All other settings remain unchanged.

¾ Select
¾ Review the line item information.
¾ Double click on the line item you want to post payment against. When assignment has been made
correctly the ‘Not assigned’ value on the bottom should equal $0.00

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (To return to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 112 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 88: Display and Review General Ledger and Vendor Account
Balances and Individual Line Items
Purpose of Exercise
To Display the Vendor account balance and line item

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Account →
Display Balances

Trans Code
Enter the following information:
¾ G/L account 780_ _ _
¾ Company code C_ _ _
¾ Fiscal year 2007

¾ (Execute)
¾ Double click on period balance to see line items.
Record details of payment to landlord:
Type Doc. Date Amount in local cur. Document No

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account →
Display/Change Line Items

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Vendor selection
¾ Vendor account (Vendor # for Tanager Leasing _ _ _)
¾ Company code C_ _ _
Line item selection
¾ Select All items

¾ (Execute)
¾ Double click on individual document to see additional information.
Verify details of:
Status Document No Type Amount in doc. curr.

¾ (Exit Twice)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 113 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 11:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 11 is to establish some of the rules that will control the material management (MM)
transactions. Included in these rules is the configuration of automatic account assignment.

Once these rules and other parameters are established you will test your system in the next unit.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 114 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 89: Set Default Values for Inventory Management


Reservations
Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will enable the system to automatically create a storage location upon goods receipt.

The movement allowed indicator must be turned on to allow goods movements for reservations. The
Days movement allowed limits the goods movements to a specific number of days prior to the
reservation date. The Retention period is the number of days after the reservation date the system will
hold the reservation before setting the deletion indicator.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Inventory Management and Physical Inventory →
Plant Parameters

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Plant P_ _ _
Goods movements
¾ Select Create SLoc.automat.
¾ Select Del. compl. default
Reservations
¾ Select Movement Allowed
¾ Days mvt. allowed 15 days
¾ Retention period 15 days

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 115 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 90: Maintain Purchasing Tolerance Limits


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the purchase
order will be allowed.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Tolerance key PE (Price variance: purchasing)
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select “Do not check” for all limits.

¾ (Next Entry)

¾ Tolerance key SE (Max. cash disc. deduction purchasing)


¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select “Do not check” for all limits.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 116 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 91: Maintain Goods Receipt Tolerance Limits


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the
purchase/production order will be allowed.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Inventory Management and Physical Inventory →
Goods Receipt → Set Tolerance Limits

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Click on the button.
¾ Tolerance key B1 (Order price qty variance (GR)/E-MSG)
¾ Enter your company code: C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select “Do not check” for all limits.

¾ (Next Entry)
¾ Tolerance key B2 (Order price qty variance (GR)/W-MSG)
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
Lower limit
Percentage
¾ Select Check limit
¾ Tolerance limit 10 %
Upper limit
Percentage
¾ Select Check limit
¾ Tolerance limit 0%

¾ (Next Entry)
¾ Tolerance key VP Moving average price variance
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select “Do not check” for all limits.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 117 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 92: Maintain Invoice Receipt Tolerance Limits


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is for you to decide how much variation from the data in the purchase
order will be allowed.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Invoice Block →
Set Tolerance Limits

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Tolerance key Reference table below
¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select “Do not check” for all limits.

¾ (Save)

¾ Use the (Next Entry) button to move to the next blank screen
Repeat for each tolerance keys in the table below:

Description Tolerance Key


Amount for item without order reference AN
Amount for item with order reference AP
Form small differences automatically BD
Percentage OPUn Variance (IR before GR) BR
Percentage OPUn Variance (GR before IR) BW
Exceed amount: quantity variance DQ
Var. from condition value KW
Price variance PP
Price variance: estimated price PS
Date variance (value x days) ST

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 118 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 93: Set (review) Valuation Control


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you activate the valuation grouping code, you can group together valuation
areas allowing multiple plants to share the same rules. This makes the configuration of automatic
postings much easier.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard→
Define Valuation Control

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ The valuation grouping code default is set as active

¾ Verify that the valuation grouping code is active.

¾ (Back)

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 119 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 94: Assign Valuation Area Grouping


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you group together valuation areas and use the same rules for account
determination. Within the chart of accounts, you assign the valuation grouping code to the valuation
areas you want to assign to the same account.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →
Group Together Valuation Areas

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Assign valuation grouping code to your valuation area
¾ Val. Grpg Code G_ _ _

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 120 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 95: Define (review) Valuation Classes


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to review which valuation classes are assigned to each material type
and account category reference.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →
Define Valuation Classes

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.

¾ Note the account category reference assigned to each of the material types used in this case study.

Verify details of:


Material Material Type Account Category Description
Type Description Reference
HAWA Trading Goods 0005 Reference for trading goods
HIBE Operating supplies 0002 Ref. for operating supplies

¾ (Exit)

¾ Click on the button.


Verify details of:
Valuation Account Category Description Description
Class Reference
3100 0005 Trading Goods Reference for trading goods
3030 0002 Operating supplies Ref. for operating supplies

¾ Note of which valuation classes are linked to the account category references you noted from
above.

¾ Why do Operating Supplies have more than one valuation class?

¾ (Exit Twice)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 121 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 96: Configure Automatic Postings for Goods Movement


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you establish the system settings controlling automatic postings to G/L accounts
for Inventory Management and Invoice Verification transactions.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →
Account Determination → Account Determination Without Wizard →
Configure Automatic Postings

Trans Code

The next few pages will have you create the automatic postings rules for the following transactions:

Transaction Description Key


Inventory Posting BSX
Materials Management Small Differences DIF
Offsetting Entry for Inventory Postings GBB
Cost (price) Difference PRD
GR/IR clearing account WRX

Click on the button.

Inventory Posting

¾ Double click on Transaction Event Key BSX


¾ Chart of Accounts C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select Valuation modif.
¾ Select Valuation class

¾ (Save)
Transaction Event Key BSX
Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):
Valuation +- Valuation Class Enter Account
Modifier Account Name
Number
G_ _ _ 3100 Trading Goods Inventory Account
G_ _ _ 3030 Operating Supplies Inventory

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 122 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Offsetting Entry for Inventory Posting

¾ Double click on Transaction Event Key GBB

Note: See the spreadsheet on the next page for additional information on Account Modifiers.
¾ Select General modification
¾ Select Valuation modif.
¾ Select Valuation class

¾ (Save)
Transaction Event Key GBB
Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):
Valuation General Valuation Enter Account
Modifier Modification Class Account Name
Number
G_ _ _ (Blank) 3030 Supplies Expense Account
G_ _ _ (Blank) 3100 Trading Goods Expense Account
G_ _ _ VAX 3100 Cost of Goods Sold Account
G_ _ _ VBR 3030 Supplies Expense Account
G_ _ _ VBR 3100 Trading Goods Expense Acct

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Cost (price) difference

¾ Double click on Transaction Event Key PRD

¾ Select Valuation modif.


¾ Select Valuation class

¾ (Save)

Transaction Event Key PRD


Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):
Valuation Valuation Class Enter Account
Modifier Account Name
Number
G_ _ _ 3030 Pur Price Dif Acct
G_ _ _ 3100 Pur Price Dif Acct

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 123 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Materials Management Small Differences

¾ Double click on Transaction Event Key DIF

¾ (Save)

Enter the following automatic account assignments (F4 to lookup the account number):
Enter Account
Account Name
Number
Pur Price Dif Account

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

Goods receipt / inv. receipt clearing acct

¾ Double click on Transaction Event Key WRX

¾ Select Valuation modif.


¾ Select Valuation class

¾ (Save)

Transaction Event Key WRX


Enter the following automatic account assignments (use F4 to lookup the account number):
Valuation Valuation Class Enter Account
Modifier Account Name
Number
G_ _ _ 3030 GR/IR Account
G_ _ _ 3100 GR/IR Account

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit back to the IMG Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 124 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Transaction Event Key: GBB – Inventory Posting Offsetting Entries


General Description of Usage of Account Material Movement Type
Account Modifier Key
Modifier
Goods Receipt From Purchase Order with 101>102 GR from Purchase Order>Reverse
Account Assignment – post to consumption
(exp.>rev.) – i.e., non-inventory purchases
AUF Goods Receipt From Production Order – 101>102 GR from Production Order>Reverse
post to production settlement 122 RE return to order
BSA Goods Receipt Into Initial Stock – only used 561>562 GR to Initial Stock
once for posting inventory off-set for initial Unrestricted>Reverse
stock data load 563>564 GR to Initial Stock Quality
Insp>Reverse
565>566 GR to Initial Stock Blocked>Reverse
INV MM Physical Inventory Posting – MM goods 701>702 GR to Physical In. Unrestricted>GI
receipt for increase count in stock, goods from
issue for decrease count in stock 703>704 GR to Physical In. Quality I>GI from
707>708 GR to Physical In. Blocked>GI from
WMS Physical Inventory Posting – WMS 711>712 GI to Inventory diff.>GR from diff.
goods issue to difference (i.e., loss) for 713>714 GI to Inventory diff. QI>GR from diff.
decrease count in stock, goods receipt from 717>718 GI to Inventory diff. Blocked>GR from
difference for increase count in stock
VAX Goods Issue To Sales - post to Cost of 231>232 GI to Sales Order (MM)>Reverse MM
Goods Sold (COGS) 531> GD, goods issue to delivery
623>624 GI cust. Returnable
packaging>Reverse
633>634 GI customer consignment>Reverse
VAY Goods Issue To Sales for Consumption 531> GD, goods issue to delivery
(e.g., goods issue to free sales samples) 623>624 GI cust. Returnable
packaging>Reverse
633>634 GI customer consignment>Reverse
641>642 TR to Stock in Transit Order>Reverse
VBO Goods Issue To Subcontracting Stock 543>544 GI to Subcontracting Stock>Reverse
VBR Goods Issue to Consumption - post to 201>202 GI to Cost Center>Reverse
material consumption (i.e., 221>222 GI to Project>Reverse
expense>revenue) 251>252 GI to Sales>Reverse
(e.g., goods issue to job or production 261>262 GI to Order>Reverse
order) 291>292 GI to All Acct. Assignments>Reverse
401>402 TP Own from Sales Order>Reverse
VNG Goods Issue to Scrap – post to scrapping 551>552 GI to Scrap Unrestricted>Reverse
material consumption (i.e., 553>554 GI to Scrap Quality Insp.>Reverse
expense>revenue) 555>556 GI to Scrap Blocked Stock>Reverse
VQP Goods Issue to Sampling – post to sampling 331>332 GI to Sampling Quality Insp.>Reverse
material consumption (i.e., 333>334 GI to Sampling Unrestricted>Reverse
expense>revenue)
ZOB Transfer Returns – Own (unrestricted) – 453>454 TP Returns to Own>Reverse
post valuated returned stock from customer
Goods Receipt w>o Purchase Order – post 501>502 GR w>o P.O. to Unrestricted>Reverse
expense>revenue account as offset to
inventory received without purchase order

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 125 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 97: Configure Automatic Postings for Taxes


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you establish the system settings controlling automatic postings to G/L accounts
for taxes.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Posting → Define Tax Accounts

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Select Sales Tax 1 MW1

¾ (Choose)

¾ (Save)
¾ Account 320_ _ _

¾ (Save)

¾ (Back)

¾ Select Sales Tax 1 VS1

¾ (Choose)

¾ (Save)
¾ Account 321_ _ _

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the IMG Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 126 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 98: Set Parameters for Invoice Verification


Purpose of Exercise
The objective of this exercise is to link the company code to the valuation elements within materials
management. The Price Carry Over indicates whether price changes in the previous period or
previous year are to affect the prices in the current period.

If you do not select this field, the price changes in the previous period or previous year have no effect
on the prices in the current period.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Valuation and Account Assignment →
Configure Price Change in Previous Period

Trans Code
Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ CoCd (Company Code) C_ _ _
¾ Check Price carr. over

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the IMG Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 127 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 99: Create Default Values for Invoice Verification


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is for you to maintain the default values for the tax codes used in invoice
verification.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Incoming Invoice →
Maintain Default Values for Tax Codes

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Click on the button.


¾ Company Code C_ _ _
Defaults, domestic:
¾ Tax Code XI

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the IMG Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 128 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 12:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 12 is to test the integration of your Material Management and Financial Accounting
systems. With both configured, it is time to create purchase orders for trading goods and operating
supplies, receive the invoices and post payment to the vendors for goods provided to your company.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 129 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 100: Create Purchase Order for Slick Pens


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Order from a know supplier (Slick Pens). This is
the first order and you need to evaluate their pens and timeliness of delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

Trans Code ME21N

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor (# for SLICK PENS)
Verify details of:
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency
BPEN_ _ _ 500 (Future date) .65 USD
CPEN _ _ _ 250 (Future date) 1.50 USD
BOX _ _ _ 1000 (Future date) 0.29 USD

¾ (Header)
Conditions Tab
¾ Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________(990)

¾ (Save)

¾
¾ Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate
this PO to the vendor.

¾ Record Purchase Order Number _________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 130 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 101: Create Purchase Order for Premier Pens


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a Purchase Order from a know supplier (Premier Pens). This is the
first order and you need to evaluate their pens and timeliness of delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

Trans Code ME21N

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor (# for PREMIER PENS)
Verify details of:
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency
CPEN_ _ _ 250 (Future date) 1.60 USD
PPEN _ _ _ 10 (Future date) 3.00 USD

¾ (Header)
Conditions Tab
¾ Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________(430)

¾ (Save)

¾
¾ Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate
this PO to the vendor.

¾ Record Purchase Order Number _________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 131 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 102: Create Purchase Order for Promotions Ltd.


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a Purchase Order from a know supplier (Promotions Ltd.).
This is the first order and you need to evaluate their pens and timeliness of delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

Trans Code ME21N

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor (# for Promotions Ltd.)
Verify details of:
Material Quantity Delivery Date Net Price Currency
BPEN_ _ _ 500 (Future date) .50 USD
PPEN _ _ _ 5 (Future date) 3.50 USD

¾ (Header)
Conditions Tab
¾ Record the total value of the Purchase order $__________(267.50)

¾ (Save)

¾
¾ Save past the message indicating that no output device (ie. Printer, FAX) was found to communicate
this PO to the vendor.

¾ Record Purchase Order Number _________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 132 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 103: Create a Goods Receipts for the Purchase Orders


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to receive the stock items into inventory that were ordered from the
three vendors.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

System Menu: Settings → Default Values


¾ Select Propose the OK Function in Future
¾ Select Propose All Items
¾ (Adopt)
¾ (Continue)

¾ Enter the PO number 4500000???( next to the Purchase order field)

¾ (Execute)
¾ Ensure each line item OK is checked
¾ SLoc (Storage Location) 10 (Inventory)

¾ Select or (Save)

¾ Repeat exercise and receive the goods for all three PO’s individually.

Record the system message:


Purchase order Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 133 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 104: Create an Invoice Receipts from Vendors


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to record the information from the invoice sent to you by the vendor.
The following vendor invoices for the stock items ordered should be entered.

INVOICE #567 (Today’s date) Slick Pens


ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:
BPEN _ _ _ 500 $0.65 $325.00
CPEN _ _ _ 250 $1.50 $375.00
BOX _ _ _ 1,000 $0.29 $290.00
TOTAL $990.00
Thank you for your order

INVOICE #3245 (Today’s date) Premier Pens


ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:
CPEN_ _ _ 250 $1.60 $400.00
PPEN _ _ _ 10 $3.00 $ 30.00
__________
TOTAL $430.00
Thank you for your order

INVOICE #7890 (Today’s date) Promotions Ltd


ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:
BPEN_ _ _ 500 $0.50 $250.00
PPEN _ _ _ 5 $3.50 $ 17.50
__________
TOTAL $267.50
Thank you for your order

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →
Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Basic data Tab


¾ Invoice date Today's date
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Purchase Order (Enter your purchase order number)

¾ (Enter)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 134 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Enter amount: $ 990.00 (or whatever the amount from the physical
invoice above)

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

Verify details of:


GL Description Amount Comments
Account

Verify details of:


GL Description Amount Comments
Account

Verify details of:


GL Description Amount Comments
Account

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Purchase order Vendor Invoice # Message

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 135 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 105: Post Payments to Vendors


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise it to make payment to the vendors for the goods received. You will post a
payment to each of the three vendors from which you have purchase trading goods.

Since the invoices are due for payment now. You are requested to clear the invoices by posting
outgoing payments to the vendors using the bank account (100_ _ _) of your chart of accounts.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Outgoing Payment → Post

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
Bank data
¾ Account 100_ _ _ (Bank – Checking)
¾ Amount Enter the amount you are going to pay
Open items selection
¾ Account (# for Slick Pens_ _ _)
¾ All other settings remain unchanged.

¾ Select
¾ Review the balance. Choose the invoice you wish to make payment against by double clicking on the
USD Gross amount. Ensure “Not assigned” field equals zero.

¾ (Save)
Repeat this process for the other two vendors

Record the system message:


Purchase order Vendor Invoice # Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

¾ Select

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 136 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 106: Display Vendor Line Items


Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account →
Display/Change Line Items

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Vendor selection
¾ Vendor (Enter the vendor number range from the lowest to the highest)
¾ Company code C_ _ _
Line item selection
¾ Select All items

¾ (Execute)
¾ Review for Open items

¾ (Exit back to the IMG Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 137 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 13:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 13 is to have you run Material Requirements Planning to generate a purchase
requisition that you will convert to a purchase order. Following conversion of the requisition you will
change the quantity and complete the purchasing (procurement) cycle.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 138 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 107: Create Purchase Outline Agreement (Contract) for


Stock Items
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a contract for the premium pen from Premier Pens for 100
pens in the next three months.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline Agreement →
Contract → Create

Trans Code ME31K

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor (# for Premier Pens)
¾ Agreement Type MK (Quantity Contract)

¾ (Enter)
Administrative Fields
¾ Validity end (3 months from today)

¾ (Overview)
Outline Agreement Items
¾ Material PPEN_ _ _
¾ Targ. Qty 300
¾ Net Price $ 3,00
¾ SLoc 10

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message
No message record could be found for output of message.

¾ Select to accept the message.

Record Contract Number: ______________________________

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 139 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 108: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item,


Single Level
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to allow the system to plan the availability and requirements for the
premium pen.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →
MRP → Planning → Single-Item, Single-Level

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Material PPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant P_ _ _
MRP control parameters
¾ Processing key NETCH
¾ Create purchase req 2
¾ Delivery schedules 3
¾ Create MRP list 1
¾ Planning mode 1
¾ Scheduling 1
Display results before they are saved
¾ Select Display results before they are saved

¾ (Enter)
¾ A warning message appears - please check input parameters

¾ (Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message


¾ Review the MRP list

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 140 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 109: Convert Proposed Purchase Requisition to Purchase


Order
Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will accept the system generated replenishment proposal for PPEN_ _ _. After you
have adopted the system proposal you will increase the quantity to 100 for PPEN_ _ _.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →
MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Reqmts List

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Individual access Tab
¾ Material PPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Double click the MRP element PurRqs

¾ (Change Element)
Item Overview section
¾ Delivery Date Today’s Date
¾ Stor. Loc. 10
Item section
Source of Supply Tab
¾
¾ Select your line with your contract number (Info/agmt. 460000####)

¾
Item Overview section
¾ Quantity 100

¾ (Save)
¾ Double click the MRP element PurRqs

¾ to convert the MRP generated purchase requisition to a PO.


¾ Vendor (# for Premier Pens)

¾ (Enter)
In the Document Overview window on left side of screen
¾ Click once on Open Requisitions

¾ (Adopt)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 141 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ (Item overview)

¾ (Header)
Conditions Tab
¾ Record the value of the Purchase Order Gross Price $ __________________

¾ (Save)

¾
¾ Record the Purchase Order Number _______________________________

¾ (Refresh)
¾ You should see the MRP Element Data changes to your Purchase Order Number

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 142 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 110: Review Outline Agreements


Purpose of Exercise
Review the outline agreement you assigned to the purchase order.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline Agreements →
List Displays → By Agreement Number

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Purchasing document Leave Blank
¾ Purchasing organization P___

¾ (Execute)
¾ Examine your open target quantity

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 143 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 111: Create a Goods Receipt


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to receive the pens into inventory.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Purchase Order 4500000???

¾ (Execute)
¾ Once executed you should see the purchase order appear in the My Documents list on the left of the
screen, the document you are working with should be highlight in red.

¾ Ensure each line item OK is checked


¾ Make sure you have entered your storage location

¾ Select or (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 144 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 112: Create an Invoice Receipt from Vendor


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to record the invoice sent by the vendor for the PO for the pens
ordered.

Premier Pens, Inc. INVOICE #203-45879

ITEMS: QUANTITY PER PRICE:


PPEN _ _ _ 100 $ 3.00 $ 300.00
__________
TOTAL $ 300.00

We appreciate your business

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →
Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Basic data Tab
¾ Invoice date Today's date
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Currency (behind amount) USD
¾ Purchase Order (Enter your purchase order number)

¾ (Enter)
¾ Enter amount: $ 300 (from the physical invoice)
¾ Tax code: XI

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 145 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 113: Post Payment to Vendor


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you post payment to the vendor for the pens. Since the invoice for Premier Pens is
due for payment. You are requested to clear the invoice amount by posting an outgoing payment using
the bank account (100_ _ _).

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Outgoing Payment → Post

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
Bank data
¾ Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)
¾ Amount $ 300
¾ Text Invoice # 203-45879
Open items selection
¾ Account (for Premier Pens _ _ _)
¾ All other settings remain unchanged.

¾ Select
¾ Review the balance. Choose the invoice you wish to make payment against by double clicking on the
GBP Gross amount. Ensure “Not assigned” field equals zero.

¾ (Post)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

¾ Select

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 146 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 14:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 14 is to create the organizational structure necessary to carry out the customer
order management functions of your company.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 147 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 114: Create Sales Organization


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the Sales Organization. This is the highest level organizational
structure in Sales and Distribution. Your pen company will have one Sales Organization.
The sales organization is the unit or structure responsible for the terms and conditions for the sale of
products or services.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Sales and Distribution →
Define, copy, delete, check sales organization

Trans Code

Double click on: Define Sales Organization.

¾ Select
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _ (use your team number)
¾ Description Pen Inc Sales _ _ _
Detailed information
¾ Address text name ADRS_SENDER
¾ Letter header text ADRS_HEADER
¾ Footer lines text ADRS_FOOTER
¾ Greeting text name ADRS_SIGNATURE
¾ Sales org.calendar US
¾ Rebate proc.active Checked
¾ Select the address button
¾ Postal Code 57069
¾ City Vermillion
¾ Country US
¾ Region SD
¾ Language English

¾ (Copy

¾ (Save)

¾ (Copy) verify the address information.


Record the system message:
Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

(Alternative Option)
¾ Select S999
¾ (Copy As)
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 148 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 115: Assign Sales Organization to Company Code


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will tie your Sales Organization to Finance Accounting (FI) by assigning it to your
Company Code.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Assign sales organization to company code

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your sales organization S_ _ _
¾ Assign it to your company code C_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ (Exit)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 149 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 116: Define Distribution Channels


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the two distribution channels you will be using. Since distribution
channels are created at the client level, once they are create everyone has access to them for use in
their own organizational structure. Distribution channels are used to define the way in which products
or services reach your customer.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Sales and Distribution →
Define, copy delete, check distribution channel

Trans Code

*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.


All students will use these Distribution Channels throughout the remainder of the course.

¾ Double Click on Define distribution channel

¾ Select
¾ Create distribution channels
RE Retail
WH Wholesale

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 150 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 117: Assign Distribution Channels to Sales Organization


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you assign the different ways in which your products reach your customer to your
Sales Organization.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Assign distribution channel to sales organization

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾
¾ SOrg S_ _ _
¾ DChl RE
Next Line
¾ SOrg S_ _ _
¾ DChl WH

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 151 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 118: Define Division


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the division you will be using. Since divisions are created at the
client level, once they are create everyone has access to them for use in their own organizational
structure. Divisions are a way of grouping materials, products, or services. A product can exist in only
one division. It is a way in which you could further divide you distribution channels if you desired to do
so.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics – General →
Define, copy, delete, check division

Trans Code

*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.


All students will use this Division throughout the remainder of the course.

¾ Double Click on Define Division

¾ Select
¾ Create Division
01 General Products

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 152 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 119: Assign Division to Sales Organization


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you tie your Divisions, or groupings of materials, to your Sales Organization.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Assign division to sales organization

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾
¾ SOrg: S_ _ _
¾ Dv: 01

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 153 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 120: Set up Sales Areas


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create Sales Areas. Sales Areas are made up of a Sales Organization, a
Distribution Channel and a Division. Sales Areas are crucial in pricing.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Set up sales area

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Assign all the Distribution channels and Divisions to your Sales Organization as follows:

¾
¾ SOrg S_ _ _
¾ DChl RE
¾ Dv 01
Next Line
¾ SOrg S_ _ _
DChl WH
¾ Dv 01

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 154 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 121: Define Common Distribution Channels


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise is to define distribution channels which have common master data. The allocation is valid
within a sales organization.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Define Common Distribution Channels

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Locate your Sales Organizations
First Line (DChl RE)
¾ DCh-Conds RE
¾ DCh-Cust/Mt RE
Next Line (DChl: WH)
¾ DCh-Conds WH
¾ DCh-Cust/Mt WH

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 155 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 122: Define Common Divisions


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise is to define the divisions that common master data should apply to. The definition is valid
within each sales organization.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Define Common Division

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Locate your Sales Organization
¾ DivCon: 01
¾ Div-Cus: 01

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

(Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 156 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 123: Define Loading Groups


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to have you review the loading groups that have been established.
Loading Groups are created at the client level and once created are available for all to use.

Loading groups are a way of grouping of materials that share the same loading requirements. They
are also used in determining the shipping point in a plant.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions →
Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination →
Define Loading Groups

Trans Code

*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.


These loading groups will be available to all users on this client.

¾ Select
First Entry
¾ LGrp Hand
¾ Description Load by Hand
Second Entry
¾ LGrp Cart
¾ Description Handcart

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 157 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 124: Create Shipping Point


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you create a shipping point within your plant. A shipping point is a physical location
inside your plant, from which you will ship items. Based on different loading and/or shipping
requirements, you can create one or more shipping points to meet your business requirements.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics Execution →
Define, copy, delete, check shipping point

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Double click on “Define shipping point”

¾ Select
¾ Shipping Point S_ _ _
¾ Shipping Point Description Shipping Point _ _ _
Times
¾ Factory Calendar US
¾ Leave all other fields blank.

¾ Select (Address)
Street Address
¾ Postal Code 57069
¾ City Vermillion
¾ Country US
¾ Region SD

¾ (Copy).

¾ (Save)

¾ (Copy) …to verify the address information.

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 158 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 125: Assign Plant to Sales Organization and Distribution


Channel
Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will enable the integration between the Material Management (MM) and the Sales and
Distribution (SD) modules. You will need to assign your plant to all combinations of a Sales
Organization and a Distribution Channel.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Assign sales organization – distribution channel – plant

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾
¾ SOrg: S_ _ _
¾ DChCust/Mt: RE
¾ Plnt: P_ _ _
Next Line
¾ SOrg: S_ _ _
¾ DChCust/Mt: WH
¾ Plnt: P_ _ _

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 159 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 126: Assign Shipping Point to Plant


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign your shipping point to your plant. A shipping point can only
exist in one plant. However, a plant can have many shipping points. The number of shipping points
will be dependent on your business requirements. Remember that a shipping point is a physical
location within a plant from which items are shipped.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics Execution →
Assign shipping point to plant

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Select your plant by double-clicking P_ _ _
¾ From the pop-up window, select YOUR shipping point to be assigned to your plant

¾ (Copy)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 160 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 15:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 15 is to create additional master data needed for conducting the customer order
management cycle. This will include creating the additional views needed for the material master,
creating additional General Ledger accounts, creating customers and assigning a pricing procedure.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 161 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 127: Create Sales Views for Trading Goods


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create (extend) the trading good materials created in earlier material
management exercises. These new views for the material masters must now be created (extended) to
include the sales views in order to make the materials available for sale.

Additionally, materials must have sales views created (extended) for both distribution channels where
they will be sold; RE and WH.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products → Material →
Trading Goods → Create

Trans Code MMH1

Defaults → Organization levels… Copy from…


Company Code C_ _ _ C_ _ _
Plant P_ _ _ P_ _ _
Sales Org S_ _ _ S_ _ _
Distr Channel* RE RE

¾ (Continue)
System Menu: Defaults → Views…
¾ Select the views: Sales: Sales Org. Data 1
Sales: Sales Org. Data 2
Sales: General/Plant Data
¾ (Continue)

¾ Material BPEN_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

Sales: Sales org. 1 Tab


General data
¾ Division 01 (General Products)
¾ Delivering Plant P__ _
Tax data
¾ Tax Jurisdiction Code UTXJ 0 (Exempt)
¾ County Sales Tax UTX2 0 (Exempt)
¾ City Sales Tax UTX3 0 (Exempt)

¾ (Enter)

Sales: sales org. 2 Tab


Grouping terms
¾ Mat. Statistics Group 1 (“A” materials)

¾ (Enter)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 162 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Sales: General/Plant Tab


Shipping data (time in days)
¾ Trans. grp.: 0001 Pallets (for route determination)
¾ Loading Grp.: HAND Load by Hand (for shipping point determination)

¾ (Save)*

¾ Complete for the other materials that you sell using the same settings as BPEN_ _ _:
¾ CPEN_ _ _
¾ PPEN_ _ _
¾ BOX_ _ _

Repeat this process for each material that you will sell in the Distribution channel: WH

*Remember to change the defaults from RE and create the WH views for all the materials

Hint: To expedite the Sales view creation process use the “copy” method by entering a material (that
has already been extended) in the “Copy from…” field. Then continue as instructed, noticing that the
initial materials data defaults into the new materials fields.

¾ (Save after each material)

Record the system messages:


Material Created/Extended Created/Extended
BPEN_ _ _
CPEN_ _ _
PPEN_ _ _
BOX_ _ _

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 163 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 128: Create Sales Revenue Account


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the two general ledger accounts you will need to record revenues
and discounts from revenues.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account 600_ _ _


¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text Sales Revenue
¾ G/L acct long text Sales Revenue

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Account currency USD
¾ Posting without tax allowed Selected

Account management in company code


¾ Check Line item display
¾ Sort key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Check “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 164 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 129: Create Sales Revenue Deductions Account


Purpose of Exercise
To process billing we will need Profit & Loss Statement accounts for Sales Revenue and Sales
Discounts

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Master Records →
G/L Accounts → Individual Processing → Centrally

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ G/L Account 610_ _ _


¾ Company Code C_ _ _

¾ (Create)

Type/Description TAB
Control in chart of accounts
¾ Account Group Profit & Loss Accounts
¾ Select Radio Button P&L statement acct

Description
¾ Short text Revenue Deductions
¾ G/L acct long text Revenue Deductions

Control Data TAB


Account control in company code
¾ Account currency USD
¾ Posting without tax allowed Selected

Account management in company code


¾ Check Line item display
¾ Sort key 001

Create/bank/interest TAB
Control of document creation in company code
¾ Field status group: ZALL
¾ Check “Post automatically only”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 165 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 130: Review Sold-to, Ship-to, Payer & Bill-to Account


Groups
Purpose of Exercise
This exercise is to have you review the different account groups that you will use to create your
customers. Account groups control the data required to create customers (business partners)

This is a review only exercise (Do not change or save).

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable →
Customer Accounts → Master Data →
Preparations for Creating Customer Master Data →
Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers)

Trans Code

¾ (Change-->Display)

¾ Select 0001 - Sold-to Parties

¾ (Details)
¾ Select General Data
¾ Select
¾ Review the required fields by double clicking on the various groups

¾ (Back)
¾ Select Company code data
¾ Select
¾ Review the required fields of the various groups

¾ (Back)
¾ Select Sales data
¾ Select
¾ Review the required fields of the various groups

¾ (Back) Twice

¾ Select 0002 – Goods Recipient (Ship-to)

¾ (Details)
¾ Select General Data
¾ Select
¾ Review the required fields of the various groups

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 166 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 131: Create Customer


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to have you create customers. You have already created business
partners (Vendors) in both Financial Accounting (FI) and Material Management (MM). Since you are in
the Sales and Distribution (SD) module now, you will create general, company code (FI) and sales and
distribution (SD) views for your customers. When you created vendors you could create them centrally
– this created all three views from a single point. The same functionality is available for customers. In
Sales and Distribution (SD) it is called “Create Complete” indicating that you want to create the General
Data, Company Code (FI) and Sales and Distribution views at the same time.

In this exercise you will create five customers. Three of these will be in your retail distribution channel
and two will exist in your wholesale distribution channel.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partner →
Customer → Create → Complete

Trans Code XD01

Enter the following information:

¾ Account group Sold-to party


¾ Customer (Leave blank)
¾ Company code C_ _ _
Sales Area
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel as listed below for each customer
¾ Division 01

¾ (Continue)

You will create the following customers:


• The Rushmore Group, LLC – Vermillion, SD 57069 Dist.Ch: RE
• SAP, America – Newtown Square, PA 19073 Dist.Ch: RE
• Promotional Products, Inc. – Sacramento, CA 95814 Dist.Ch: WH
• Pleasure Boats Buying Group – Miami, FL 33010 Dist.Ch: WH
• Tanagers Leasing – Vermillion, SD 57069 Dist.Ch: RE (Customer and Vendor)

Address TAB:
Name
¾ Name: Customer’s name (see above list)
Search term
¾ Search Term: ___
Street Address
¾ Postal Code: Customer’s zip code
¾ City: Customer’s city
¾ Country: US
¾ Region: Customer's State
¾ Transportation zone Enter appropriate Transportation zone (used for route determination)
Communication
¾ Language: English

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 167 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Control data TAB (only when creating for Tanager Leasing):


Account control
¾ Vendor Enter the vendor number for Tanager Leasing – remember that Tanager
Leasing is not only a customer but also a vendor

¾ Select (Financial Accounting)


Account Management TAB:
Accounting Information
¾ Recon. account Enter your A/R reconciliation account number (110_ _ _)
¾ Sort key 001 (posting date)

Payment transactions TAB:


Payment Data
¾ Terms of payment 0001 (Payable immediately, Due net)

¾ Select
Sales TAB:
Sales order
¾ Currency: USD
Pricing/Statistics
¾ Cust.pric.proc. 1 (standard)
¾ Cust. Stats. Grp 1 “A” material. (helps determine which data are updated in the LIS)

Shipping TAB:
Shipping
¾ Delivery priority 02 (normal item)
¾ Order Combination Selected (default)
¾ Shipping Conditions 01 (standard)
¾ Delivering Plant P_ _ _
Partial deliveries
¾ Max.part.deliveries 3 (9 is the default)

Billing Document TAB:


Delivery and payment terms
¾ Incoterms FOB, Origin Shipping Dock (note the both are necessary)
¾ Payment terms 0001
Accounting
¾ Acct assgmt group 01 (Domestic Revenues)
Taxes
¾ Tax Classification 0 (for all 3 tax categories)

¾ (Save)
¾ Repeat for each of the new customers and record their customer numbers.
Record the system message:
Customer Customer Number
The Rushmore Group, LLC
SAP, America
Promotional Products, Inc.
Pleasure Boats Buying Group
Tanagers Leasing

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 168 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 132: Create Ship-to party


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will create an alternative ship-to location or goods recipient. SAP, America has an
organization to which they wish to have you ship directly. This new ship-to or goods recipient party is
SAP, America – UAP (University Alliance Program). In order to do this you will create a specific ship-to
customer for this separate address.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners →
Customer → Create → Complete

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Account group Goods Receipt


¾ Customer (Leave blank)
¾ Company code C_ _ _
Sales Area
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Continue)

Address TAB:
Name
¾ Name SAP, America – UAP
Search term
¾ Search term ___
Street Address
¾ Postal Code 19073
¾ City Newtown Square
¾ Country US
¾ Region PA
¾ Transportation zone 000000001
Communication
¾ Language English

¾ Select (Financial Accounting)


Account Management TAB:
Accounting Information
¾ Recon. account Enter your A/R reconciliation account number (110_ _ _)
¾ Sort key 001 (posting date)

Payment Transactions TAB:


Payment data
¾ Terms of payment 0001 (Payable immediately, Due net)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 169 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Select

Shipping TAB:
Shipping
¾ Delivery Priority 02 (normal item)
¾ Order Combination Selected (default)
¾ Shipping Conditions 01 (standard)
¾ Delivering Plant P_ _ _
Partial deliveries
¾ Max. partial deliveries 3 (9 is the default)

Billing Document TAB:


Taxes
¾ Tax Classification 0 (for all 3 tax categories)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Customer Customer Number
SAP, America - UAP

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 170 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 133: Assign Ship-to party to Customer


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will assign the newly created good recipient to the sold-to party created in an
earlier exercise. Please note that the purpose of this exercise is to end up with an additional ship-to
party – not to replace the old ship-to party with a new one. You will complete this by changing the
original SAP, America customer by adding SAP, America – UAP customer as an additional ship-to
party on the Partner Functions Tab of the sold-to party.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners →
Customer → Change → Complete

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Customer: Customer # for SAP, America
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
Sales area
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Continue)

¾ Select (if needed)


Partner Functions TAB:
Partner Functions
¾ Partner function (add new line) SH (Ship-to party)
¾ Number Customer # for SAP, America - UAP

¾ (Enter)
“Ship to Party” and the name will appear.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 171 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 16:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 16 is to define prices for materials, specific customer prices, and discounts. In this
unit you will also establish credit limits for your customers and define those material stocks that will be
considered when you are conducting an availability check for a sales order.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 172 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 134: Create Material Prices


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will create material prices that any customer would pay. In determining price this
would be the last price that would be used to determine pricing for an item.

Prices are defined by Sales Organization and Distribution Channel.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →

Prices → Material Price

Trans Code VK31

Enter the following information to set up retail prices:

¾ Select Cnty SOrg. DChl Material ReSt


¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE

Enter the following material and pricing information:


(Co) Condition Material Amount
PR00 BPEN_ _ _ $ 1.09
PR00 CPEN_ _ _ $ 2.29
PR00 PPEN_ _ _ $ 9.95
PR00 BOX_ _ _ $ 0.49

¾ (Enter)
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions, units of measure, and validity dates.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

Enter the following information to set up wholesale prices:

¾ Double click on

¾ Select Cnty SOrg. DChl Material ReSt


¾ Sales Organization S___
¾ Distribution Channel WH

Refer the table on the next page…

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 173 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Enter the following material and pricing information:


(Co) Condition Material Amount
PR00 BPEN_ _ _ $ 0.89
PR00 CPEN_ _ _ $ 1.99
PR00 PPEN_ _ _ $ 7.50
PR00 BOX_ _ _ $ 0.49

¾ (Enter)
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions, units of measure, and validity dates.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 174 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 135: Create Customer Specific Material Price


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will create a special price that a specific customer receives for a specified validity
period.

This allows you to create special customer/material pricing.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →

Prices → Individual Prices

Trans Code VK31

Enter the following information:

¾ Select CnTy SOrg. DChl Customer Material ReSt


¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE
¾ Customer SAP, America

Enter the following material and pricing information:


(Co) Condition Material Amount Valid From Valid to
PR00 CPEN_ _ _ $ 2.09 Today’s Date 3 months from today
PR00 PPEN_ _ _ $ 8.50 Today’s Date 3 months from today

¾ (Enter)
The system will automatically enter the material descriptions and units of measure

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 175 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 136: Create Customer Discount


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to show how a customer specific discount is created.

This also serves to introduce you to the concept of a pricing scale.

This condition type is currently set for Item condition (line item), but could be changed to Header
condition in configuration. If it is set to a Header condition, the discount would apply to the order as a
whole rather than to the individual line items in the order.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create →

Discounts/Surcharges → By Customer

Trans Code VK31

Enter the following information:

¾ Select CnTy SOrg. DChl Customer ReSt


¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel WH
Customer with Release Status
¾ (Co) Condition K007
¾ Customer Promotional Products, Inc.

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select K007 line

¾ Click on the scales button to give the customer a discount of 5% for order values between
$1,000.00 and $1,999.99 and a discount of 8% for order values between $2,000.00 and $2,999.99
and a discount of 10% for orders larger than $2,999.99.

Scale value 1000.00 Amount 5


Scale value 2000.00 Amount 8
Scale value 3000.00 Amount 10

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 176 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 137: Establish Credit Limit for Customers


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to establish credit limits for your customers. Each customer has an
established credit limit. How the system reacts to a customer that has exceeded the credit limit you
established is determined in configuration. The current setting is to provide a warning message, but
not stop the processing of an order or delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Credit Management → Master Data →
Change

Trans Code FD32

Enter the following information:


¾ Customer Customer # for The Rushmore Group, LLC
¾ Credit control area C_ _ _
¾ Check the following Overview
Central Data
Status

¾ (Enter)
Page forward to:
Customer Credit Management Change: Central Data
Maximum permitted credit limits
¾ Total amount 5000
¾ Individual limit 5000
¾ Currency USD
Customer Credit Management Change: Status
Credit limit data
¾ Credit Limit 5000

¾ (Save)
Repeat this for the other four customers (amounts need to be in all three places).

Customer Credit limit Currency


The Rushmore Group, LLC $ 5,000 USD
SAP, America $ 25,000 USD
Promotional Products, Inc. $ 2,500 USD
Pleasure Boats Buying Group $ 5,000 USD
Tanager Leasing $ 1,000 USD

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 177 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 17:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 16 is to complete some final details necessary to prepare you for the
comprehensive system test that begins in the next unit. This unit will have you create some specialized
master data as well as complete the final configuration steps of shipping point and revenue account
assignment determinations.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 178 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 138: Assign Sales Areas to Pricing Procedure


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to link your sales area to a pricing procedure. The RVAJUS pricing
procedure is the standard USA pricing procedure with jurisdiction code. The pricing procedure which
will be discussed in detail in the next unit is the manner in which prices are assigned to individual line
items in your order as well as discounts, surcharges, etc.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control →
Define and Assign Pricing Procedures

Trans Code

Double click on Define Pricing Procedure Determination


Enter the following information:

¾ Select
Verify details of:
SOrg DChl Dv DoPr CuPP PriPr
S_ _ _ RE 01 A 1 RVAAPC
S_ _ _ WH 01 A 1 RVAAPC

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 179 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 139: Define Availability Check for Sales Orders


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the stocks that are to be included when you conduct and availability
check at time of inquiry, quotation, order, delivery, etc. This is completed at the client level and as such
you will only need to review this. It is important to note the type of stock and their status as to whether
or not they are considered during the availability check.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions →
Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements → Availability Check →
Availability Check with ATP Logic or Against Planning →
Carry Out Control for Availability Check

Trans Code

*The instructor, as a demonstration will complete this task.


This availability check rule will be available to all users on this client.

The instructor will complete the following information:

¾ Select 02 for A (SD orders)

¾ Select (Display)
Replenishment Lead time
¾ Deselect Check without RLT

¾ (Back Twice)

¾ Student select 02 for A (SD orders)

¾ Select (Display)

¾ (Back Twice)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 180 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 140: Assign Sales and Delivery Documents to Credit Check


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign sales and delivery documents to a Credit Check.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions →
Credit Management/Risk Management → Credit Management →
Assign Sales Documents and Delivery Documents

Trans Code

Verify the following information

Double click on Credit limit check for order types


¾ For Order type OR
¾ Credit Check A

¾ (Back)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

¾ (Cancel)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 181 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 141: Create Shipping Point Determination


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will create the table that will determine the shipping point to be used in your plant.
While you have only created one shipping point, you still need to create the determination table. In
determining the shipping point, the following are considered:
• The Plant from the (1) Customer Ship-to Master or the (2) Material Master,
• The Shipping Conditions from the customer master, and
• The Loading Group from the material master.

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions →
Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination →
Assign Shipping Points

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Select
Shipping Point Information:
SC (Shipping LGrp Plnt PrShP (Proposed Shipping point):
condition): (Loading group): (Plant):
01 (Standard) HAND (Load by Hand) P_ _ _ S_ _ _
01 (Standard) CART (Handcart) P_ _ _ S_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 182 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 142: Create Revenue Account Assignment Key


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise creates the automatic posting of revenues when the billing document is created. At time
of billing revenues are posted to the General Ledger Account. Which account to be posted is
determined by a combination of:
• The Sales Organization,
• The Account assignment key, and
• The Account Assignment Group (Customer Master)

Navigation
Menu Path Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project→
Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Account Assignment/Costing →
Revenue Account Determination → Assign G/L Accounts

Trans Code

¾ Select Table 2: “Cust. Grp/Account Key”

¾ (Choose)

Enter the following information:

¾ Select
Account assignment information:
App CndTy ChAc SOrg AAG ActKy G/L Account
V KOFI C_ _ _ S_ _ _ 01 ERL 600_ _ _
V KOFI C_ _ _ S_ _ _ 01 ERS 610_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit back to the Easy Access Menu)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 183 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 143: Check Stock Status


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to obtain current inventory information about your products.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code MMBE

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material Choose any material
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 184 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Comprehensive Test of Business Case Scenario

Unit 18:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 18 is to provide a comprehensive testing of the organizational and master data,
you have set up using a series of transactions. These transactions will provide you with an
understanding of how the options you selected during configuration impact your transactions.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 185 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 144: Create Sales Order


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a sales order. This if the first exercise that will test the configuration
of your system as a trading goods company. The other exercises in this unit replicate the sales
exercises completed in Unit 2.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Trans Code VA01

Enter the following information:

¾ Order type OR
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Sold-to party Customer # for The Rushmore Group, LLC
¾ PO Number 144-_ _ _
¾ PO date Today’s date

Sales TAB
¾ Req. deliv. date 3 days from today

Enter the following:


Material QTY
BPEN_ _ _ 250
CPEN _ _ _ 100
PPEN _ _ _ 50
BOX _ _ _ 150

¾ (Enter)

Review
Item Specific Data:
¾ Select line item 10
¾ (Conditions)
¾ Review item pricing
What is the price per unit for BPEN_ _ _? _____________________

¾ (Back)

¾ Select line item 20


¾ (Schedule lines for item)
¾ What is the date for the confirmed quantity? _______________________

¾ (Back)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 186 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Select line item 30


¾ (Display availability)
¾ What is a simulated Requirement? _____________________________________

¾ (Back)

Header Data:
System Menu: Goto → Header → Sales

Sales TAB
Note and record the pricing procedure ______________________

Conditions TAB
Note and record the net value for the order – this is the total of all line items $____________________

¾ (Back)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 187 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 145: Check Stock Status


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.

¾ Open a new session (or System Menu: System → Create session)


Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material Any material from your sales order
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 188 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 146: Create Delivery Note for Sales Order


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a delivery based on the customer’s order. Creating the
delivery brings your order to the point where stock availability is re-determined, and the quantity of
ordered items are moved to a scheduled for delivery stock status.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →
With Reference to Sales Order

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Shipping point: S_ _ _
Sales order data
¾ Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today
¾ Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier

¾ (Enter)
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.
Item Overview Tab
¾ Click on the line item 10

¾ (Item Details)
¾ What is the picking status? _______________________________

¾ (Back)
Picking Tab:
¾ Enter the Storage location for each item
¾ Sloc: 10 (Inventory)

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 189 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 147: Check Stock Status


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.

¾ Open a new session (or System Menu: System → Create session)


¾ Now go to your other session (Alt + Tab), and leave this session open.
¾ Click on the REFRESH icon or if the Stock Overview is no longer displayed enter the menu
path and information below.
Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material Any material from your sales order
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 190 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 148: Picking Materials on Delivery Note


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the materials. The delivery note indicates the quantity of the
proposed materials per delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code VL02N

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ (Enter)
The material delivery quantity is proposed.
Picking Tab
¾ Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity
¾ Picked Qty = Deliv. Qty

¾ (Save)
¾ Recheck the stock status of the materials. Note that no change has occurred in the stock status - the
quantities are still in the “Schd. for delivery” stock type field.

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 191 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 149: Post Goods Issue


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you post goods issue. Post goods issue reduces unrestricted stock to reflect
the inventory shipped. This is the time at which the ownership of the goods changes from you to the
customer. These goods have left your plant and are now owned by your customer. Both inventory and
costs of goods sold are impacted by this transaction.

If you have shipped or sold the goods FOB Destination, the actual change of ownership takes place at
the time the goods are received at the customer’s location. However, the system reflects the materials
are no longer available in your stock at the time of post good issue.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change→ Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ Select

The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 192 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 150: Check Stock Status


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.

¾ Now go to your other session (Alt + Tab), and leave this session open.
¾ Click on the REFRESH icon or if the Stock Overview is no longer displayed enter the menu
path and information below.
Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material Any material from your sales order
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Record the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Record the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Record the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 193 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 151: Bill Customer


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can
bill your customer for those goods.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Trans Code VF01

The system will default the last delivery document created.

¾ (Execute)
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.
¾ Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________

¾ (Save)
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 194 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 152: Post Receipt of Customer Payment


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and
reduce the customers account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation
account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Incoming Payment

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Document Date: Today’s date


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _
¾ Currency/Rate: USD

Bank data:
¾ Account: 100_ _ _
¾ Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)

Open item selection


¾ Account: Customer # for The Rushmore Group, LLC

¾ Select

¾ Double click on “USD gross” amount for the Customer Invoice until “Not assigned” is $ 0.00

¾ (Post)

¾ Record the document number for this posting ________________

Record the system message:


Message

¾ (Exit)

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 195 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 153: Review Document Flow


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise provides you with exposure to a powerful tool in customer order management. The
document flow provides a look at the entire transaction from beginning to the end. In this example, you
have created an order, a delivery, posted goods issue, billed the customer and received payment. To
examine the flow, you can begin with any one of these document numbers and the document flow will
show an audit trail of all documents tied to that number.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display

Trans Code

¾ Enter your sales order number.

System Menu: Environment → Display Document flow

The system displays a list of documents associated with the order.

¾ Click on the line of the GD goods issue: delvy 49000….###

¾ Select
The system displays the material document with a goods movement “601”, which is the movement type
for goods issue to a delivery note (Post Goods Issue).

¾ Select to view the account postings for this goods movement.

¾ (Back) To the Document Flow Screen


It can be seen that the:
1. The entire document flow is shown.
2. There are no open documents.
3. The business cycle is complete.

Note: You can view the document flow from the Sales Order, Delivery or Billing screens.

¾ Click on the line of the Standard Order #


¾ Select the
¾ The document flow can be seen in greater detail.

¾ Click on the line of the Outbound Delivery #


¾ Select the
¾ The Document Header Status can be viewed

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 196 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 19:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 19 is to create a sales order using your customer info record for Pleasure Boats
Buying Group and then complete the order to cash business process.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 197 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 154: Create Customer Material Info Record


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise introduces you to the concept of Customer Material Information Records. When a
customer wishes to order materials from us using a different naming convention than you do, you can
set up a Customer Material Info Record which allows us to enter materials by the customer's specific
naming convention. This is especially true in the wholesale area. Customers order products by their
product number not necessarily your product number. SAP provides for the translation of these
materials into your material names, which enables the customer and your sales representative to
communicate clearly.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Agreements →
Customer Material Information → Create

Trans Code VD51

Enter the following information:


¾ Customer Customer # for Pleasure Boats Buying Group
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel WH

¾ (Enter)
¾ Enter the following materials and the corresponding customer material name as indicated:
Material – Customer Specific Information:
Material No Pleasure Boats Buying Group Material Number
BPEN_ _ _ Pen-Low
CPEN_ _ _ Pen-Med
PPEN_ _ _ Pen-High
BOX_ _ _ Pen-Box

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 198 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 155: Create Sales Order Using Customer Info Record


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a sales order using Pleasure Boats Buying Group customer/material
info record (their part numbers/name).

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Order type OR
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution channel WH
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Sold-to party Customer # for Pleasure Boats Buying Group
¾ PO Number 155-_ _ _
¾ PO date Today’s date

¾ (Enter)

Ordering party tab


A new field appears in the Sales Order line item: “Customer Material Numb.”

Enter the following customer materials and quantities:


Customer Material Numb Order Quantity Material (Leave blank)
Pen-Low 250
Pen-Med 100
Pen-High 30
Pen-Box 130

¾ (Enter)

Note: The system references the customer material numbers and copies our equivalent material number
and all relevant data.

¾ Check the pricing to see that wholesale pricing was applied.

¾ Go to the header and record the Sales Orders Net Value $________________________

¾ (Save)

Record the order number: _______________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 199 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 156: Create Delivery for Sales Order


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a delivery based on the customer’s order. Creating the
delivery brings your order to the point where stock availability is re-determined, and the quantity of
ordered items are moved to a scheduled for delivery stock status.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →
With Reference to Sales Order

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Shipping point: S_ _ _
Sales order data
¾ Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today
¾ Order: Enter the order number of the sales order created earlier

¾ (Enter)
The system defaults the items and quantities from the sales order that are scheduled to be delivered.
Item Overview Tab
¾ Click on the line item 10

¾ (Item Details)
¾ What is the picking status? _______________________________

¾ (Back)
Picking Tab:
¾ Enter the Storage location for each item
¾ Sloc: 10 (Inventory)

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the Outbound Delivery number: _________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 200 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 157: Pick Materials on Delivery Note


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the materials. The delivery note indicates the quantity of the
proposed materials per delivery.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ (Enter)
The material delivery quantity is proposed.
Picking Tab
¾ Enter Pick quantity to match the proposed delivery quantity
¾ Picked Qty = Deliv. Qty

¾ (Save)

To recheck the stock status (see earlier exercises):


¾ Create new session.
¾ Check the stock status of the materials
¾ Check the stock status of the materials. Note that the stock status - the quantities are in the “Schd.
for delivery” stock type field.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 201 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 158: Post Goods Issue


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you post goods issue. Post goods issue reduces unrestricted stock to reflect
the inventory shipped. This is the time at which the ownership of the goods changes from you to the
customer. These goods have left your plant and are now owned by your customer. Both inventory and
costs of goods sold are impacted by this transaction.

Navigation
Menu Path:
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code:

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ Select

The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.

To recheck the stock status (see earlier exercises):


¾ Switch back to your other session that is still on the Stock overview.
¾ Check the stock status of the materials

Note the quantity from the “Schd. for delivery” stock type has disappeared and the “Unrestricted use”
stock quantity has been reduced.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 202 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 159: Bill customer


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can
bill your customer for those goods.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Trans Code

The system will default the last delivery document created.

¾ (Execute)
The system displays the customer and the materials on the delivery with total values to be billed.
¾ Record the total amount billed to the customer: $____________________

¾ (Save)
Record the billing document number that is displayed at the bottom of the screen ________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 203 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 160: Post Receipt of Customer Payment


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and
reduce the customers account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation
account.

Navigation
Menu Path:
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Incoming Payments

Trans Code:

Enter the following information:

¾ Document Date: Today’s date


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _
¾ Currency/Rate: USD

Bank data:
¾ Account: 100_ _ _
¾ Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)

Open item selection


¾ Account: Customer # for Pleasure Boats Buying Group

¾ Select

¾ Review the “Not assigned” amount. Is it equal to zero?

¾ (Post)

¾ Record the document number for this posting ________________

Record the system message:


Message

¾ Return to the Sales Order and review the Document flow for the customer orders that you just
processed.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 204 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 20:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 20 is to create a sales order using a scheduling agreement for The Rushmore
Group and deliver against the scheduling agreement.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 205 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 161: Create a Scheduling Agreement


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a scheduling agreement for The Rushmore Group.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Scheduling Agreement → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Sched. Agreemt Type LP


Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Scheduling Agreeme (leave blank)
¾ Sold-to party The Rushmore Group, LLC
¾ Ship-to part leave blank
¾ PO number 161-_ _ _
¾ PO date Today’s date

Item overview TAB:


¾ Description: Scheduling Agreement _ _ _
¾ Valid-from date: Today’s date
¾ Valid-to date: Six months from today’s date
All items
¾ Material: CPEN_ _ _
¾ Target quantity: 250

¾ (Enter)

¾ Select the item line for CPEN_ _ _


¾ Select Schedule lines for items button from the button bar on the bottom

Enter three schedule lines


¾ First line 6 days from today for 50 pens
¾ Second line 14 days from today for 100 pens
¾ Third line: 2 months from today for 100 pens

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the Scheduling Agreement Number: ___________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 206 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 162: Process Deliveries for a Scheduling Agreement


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a delivery with reference to the scheduling agreement.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document →
With Reference to Sales Order

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Shipping point: S_ _ _
Sales order data
¾ Selection date: Enter a date 7 days from today
¾ Order: Enter the order number of the Scheduling Agreement created earlier

¾ (Enter)
¾ Performing the steps for Picking and Posting Goods Issue.
¾ Record Outbound Delivery Number: _________________________
¾ Repeat the exercise using a selection date 14 day’s from today’s date
¾ Record Outbound Delivery Number: _________________________

Note that by selecting dates after the due date of each schedule line, only the material scheduled
as due by that date is selected

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 207 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 163: Display Scheduling Agreement


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you display the scheduling agreement you created earlier to review the current
status.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Scheduling Agreement → Display

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Scheduling Agreement Scheduling Agreement # you created

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select the line item

¾ Select (Schedule lines for item)

Note the “Delivered qty” field now has the quantity of the material delivered filled in for those deliveries
that have been made.

Select (Display document flow)

Review the document flow you will see one schedule agreement followed by first outbound delivery, the
picking request and the post goods issue then the second outbound delivery, the picking request and the
post goods issue.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 208 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 164: Check Stock Status


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to update the current inventory information about your products.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Database selections
¾ Material CPEN _ _ _ (check for all materials and record below)
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select

¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.

¾ Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type


¾ Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Check the customer scheduling agreements quantity (Customer Scheduling Agreements) stock type
¾ Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type
Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Sales Orders
Customer Scheduling Agreements
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 209 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 165: Bill customer


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will create the billing document for the customer. It is at this time when the revenue is
recognized and posted to the general ledger. Once the post goods issue has been completed, you can
bill your customer for those goods.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Trans Code

Create a billing document for each of the two outbound delivery documents created in exercise 162.
¾ Record the billing document number for the 1st delivery: __________________________
¾ Record the billing document number for the 2nd delivery: __________________________
¾ What is the total for both invoices? ___________________________

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 210 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 166: Run Customer Credit Check


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to review the customer credit profile.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Credit Management →
Credit management info system → Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Credit account Customer # for The Rushmore Group, LLC
¾ Credit control area C_ _ _

¾ (Execute)

¾ Place cursor on customer number


System Menu: Environment → Credit Master Sheet
¾ Review information

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 211 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 167: Post Receipt of Customer Payment


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will see your customer paying the invoice you created in the billing exercise. The
payment will be posted to the general ledger accounts. This entry will increase the bank account and
reduce the customers account receivable balance as well as the account receivable reconciliation
account.

Navigation
Menu Path:
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Incoming Payments

Trans Code:

Enter the following information:

¾ Document Date: Today’s date


¾ Company Code: C_ _ _
¾ Currency/Rate: USD

Bank data:
¾ Account: 100_ _ _
¾ Amount: Enter the amount of the payment (total from both invoices)

Open item selection


¾ Account: Customer # for The Rushmore Group, LLC

¾ Select

¾ Review the “Not assigned” amount. Is it equal to zero?

¾ (Post)

¾ Record the document number for this posting ________________

¾ Note that we can clear more than one invoice with a single incoming payment.

Record the system message:


Message

¾ Return to the Scheduling Agreement and review the Document flow for the agreement.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 212 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 21:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 21 is to create two sales orders. One sales order using the item proposal and the
second sales order that will result in a credit warning, as well as request more goods than you have for
sale. This will require you to run Material Requirements Planning, convert purchase requisitions to
purchase orders, receive the goods, receive the invoices, and post payment to the vendors. The
deliveries for these sales orders will be completed in the next unit.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 213 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 168: Create Item Proposal


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to allow for situations where a customer often places an order with the
same line items, an Item Proposal (order template) can be created with the standard line items and
quantities already filled in. You can then pull the standard items in as you create the sales order by
referencing the Item Proposal. Once referenced and pulled into the order quantities can be changed,
line items can be deleted or added.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Products →
Item Proposal → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Item Proposal Type PV
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Item proposal leave blank
¾ Description SAP Promotion Set
¾ Valid-from date Today’s date
¾ Valid-to date One year from today
¾ Enter the following materials and quantities:
BPEN_ _ _ 100
CPEN_ _ _ 75
PPEN_ _ _ 25
BOX_ _ _ 100

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the Item Proposal Number: _____________________

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 214 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 169: Assign Item Proposal to Customer


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will now assign that item proposal to the customer master. Whenever you ask for
an Item Proposal in a sales order for that customer, the system will default this Item Proposal.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partner →
Customer → Change → Complete

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Customer SAP America
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
Sales area
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)

¾ Select
Sales TAB
¾ Item proposal # of the newly created item proposal.

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 215 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 170: Create Sales Order Using Item Proposal


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a sales order using the item proposal we created and assigned to
SAP, America. We will use the materials and quantities in the item proposal.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Order type OR
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution channel RE
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Sold-to party Customer # for SAP, America
¾ Ship-to party Leave Blank
¾ PO Number 170-_ _ _
¾ PO date Today’s date

¾ (Enter)

A pop-up window appears with the two “ship-to” addresses for this customer.
¾ Select SAP, America – UAP

¾ (Enter)

¾ Select: to search for your item proposal

In the pop-up window, the system copies the number of the product proposal for this customer

¾ Select

You may also need to select the delivery you wish:


• One-time del. On req. del. dte.
• Complete delivery
• Dely proposal
¾ Select (Copy) for a Complete delivery – Note: This may happen for multiple items.

Review the pricing options:


¾ Select the line item CPEN_ _ _
¾ Click and note the pricing ___________________________

¾ (Back)

¾ Select the line item PPEN_ _ _

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 216 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ Click and note the pricing ____________________________

¾ (Back)

¾ Select the line item BPEN_ _ _


¾ Click and note the pricing ___________________________

¾ (Back)

Does the material pricing include the special customer pricing that was established for SAP, United
Kingdom? ________________________________________________________________________

¾ Record the Sales Order Net Value: _________________________

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the Sales Order Number: _____________________________

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 217 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 171: Create Sales Order – Value Discount


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create a sales order that will demonstrate the discounts prices we
established for Promotional Products, Inc.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

¾ Order type OR
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution channel WH
¾ Division 01

¾ (Enter)
¾ Sold-to party Customer # for Promotional Products, Inc
¾ PO Number 171-_ _ _
¾ PO date Today’s date

¾ (Enter)

Sales TAB
¾ Req. deliv. date 3 days from today

Enter the following:


Material QTY
BPEN_ _ 1000
CPEN _ _ _ 550
PPEN _ _ _ 275
BOX _ _ _ 825

¾ (Enter)

You will need to select the delivery you wish:


• One-time del. On req. del. dte.
• Complete delivery
• Dely proposal
¾ Select (Copy) for a Complete delivery

You will receive one or more warnings that credit limit is exceeded – Note: This is only an information
message or warning; as such you will be able to continue processing the order.

¾ Select the line item CPEN_ _ _


¾ Click and note the pricing and discount

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 218 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

¾ (Back)

¾ Select the line item PPEN_ _ _


¾ Click and note the pricing and discount

Review
The material pricing includes the 5% discount from the customer-specific material pricing record for
>$1,000 and <$2,000 and the 8% discount for items with an extended value of >$2,000 and <$3,000 and
the 10% discount for items with an extended value of >$3,000.

¾ Change the quantity of the line item for PPEN_ _ _ from 275 to 420 and verify that the discount
changed.

¾ Select the line item PPEN_ _ _


¾ Click and note the pricing and discount

¾ (Back)

¾ Record the Sales Order Net Value: ______________________________

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the Sales Order Number: ______________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 219 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 172: Run Material Requirements Planning – Single Item,


Single Level
Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to have the system plan all MRP relevant materials.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management →Material Requirements Planning (MRP) →
MRP → Planning → Total Planning → Online

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Scope of planning Leave Blank
¾ Plant P_ _ _
MRP control parameters
¾ Processing key NETCH
¾ Create purchase req 2
¾ Schedule lines 3
¾ Create MRP list 1
¾ Planning mode 1
¾ Scheduling 1
Display results before they are saved
¾ Select Display material list

¾ (Enter)
¾ A warning message appears - please check input parameters

¾ (Enter) again to confirm and check the warning message


¾ An information message appears indicating you will need to press enter to start the planning run.

¾ (Continue)

¾ To review the MRP list select


¾ Material PPEN_ _ _

¾ Press (Enter)
¾ Review the MRP list for PPEN_ _ _
Note that there may be multiple requisitions for each material due to different requirement dates.
¾ Review MRP list for BPEN_ _ _ ; CPEN_ _ _ ; PPEN_ _ _; and BOX_ _ _

BPEN_ _ _ CPEN_ _ _ PPEN_ _ _ BOX_ _ _


Total for all Requisitions

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 220 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 173: Create Purchasing Information Record for PPEN


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create purchasing information records for PPEN_ _ _. A purchasing
information record creates a link between a material and a vendor.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management →Purchasing → Master Data →
Info Record → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor Vendor # for Slick Pens
¾ Material PPEN_ _ _
¾ Purchasing Org. P_ _ _
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Enter)

Enter the following information on the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data 1 screen
¾ Standard Qty.: 1
¾ Net Price: 3.25

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 221 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 174: Assign Source of Supply to Purchase Requisitions


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to assign a source of supply for your purchase requisitions.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) →
MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List

Trans Code MD04

Enter the following information:


Individual access Tab
¾ Material: PPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant: P_ _ _

¾ (Enter)
¾ Select a requisition (if more than one – select the one with the largest quantity)
¾ (Detail of element)

¾ (Change element)
Item Overview section
¾ Enter the Storage Location 10
Item section
Source of Supply Tab

¾ This provides a list of possible sources of supply. Select Slick Pens _ _ _ by clicking in the Assign
Source of Supply box next to the vendor number. There should be a green dot next to the vendor
number after you have assigned the source of supply (see below).

¾ (Save)
¾ Assign Slick Pens as the Source of Supply for to largest requisitions for BPEN_ _ _ ; CPEN_ _ _ ;
and BOX_ _ _ in the same manner as you have just completed for PPEN_ _ _.
Record the system message:
Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 222 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 175: Create Purchase Order via Requisition Assignment List


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create a purchase order using a requisition assignment list. Since
you have assigned a source of supply to your requisition in the previous exercise, you can now convert
these purchase requisitions into a single purchase order as they are all assigned to the same vendor.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Create → Via Requisition Assignment List

Trans Code ME58

Enter the following information:


¾ Vendor Vendor # for Slick Pens
¾ Plant P_ _ _

¾ (Execute)
¾ Select the line showing the number of purchase orders (there should be 4)

¾ Click on the button

Verify the following:


¾ Order Type NB
¾ Purchase Order Date Today’s Date
¾ Purchase Order Leave Blank
¾ Purchasing Group ___
¾ Purchasing Organization P_ _ _

¾ (Continue)

¾ Single-Click on Open Requisitions line in the left window (see below)

¾ Then Select (Adopt)


¾ Enter through warning if delivery date can’t be met and the existence of a contract.

¾ Verify the details of the purchase order

¾ Increase the PO Amount for each item by 150 over the total of all requisitions recorded when you ran
MRP online.

¾ Record the amounts for the individual lines items as well as the total order in the table below

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 223 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Item Number Ordered Dollar Amount

PPEN _ _ _
CPEN _ _ _
BPEN _ _ _
BOX _ _ _
Total for PO

¾ (Save)

¾ Record the new purchase order number._____________________

¾ (Exit )

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 224 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 176: Create Goods Receipt


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you receive the pens that have arrived at your receiving dock and are ready to be
received into inventory.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order →
GR for Purchase Order (MIGO)

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Purchase Order 4500000???

¾ (Execute)
¾ Ensure each line item OK is checked
¾ Verify storage location was entered 10 (Inventory)
Notice that the quantity from the PO defaults as the quantity to receive.

¾ Select or (Save)
¾ Record the Material Document Number: _______________________

¾ View the material document by changing the transaction from Goods Receipt to Display. This will
bring up your material document.

¾ (Execute)
¾ You should see your material document – record the movement type: _____________
Doc. info Tab

¾ Select to view the financial document


¾ Record the Financial Accounting Document Number: _______________________
¾ Record the name of the two G/L accounts posted to in this transaction:
_________________________________ _________________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 225 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 177: Create Invoice Receipt from Vendor


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise has you enter the Vendors invoiced for the items ordered.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification →
Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Trans Code

Enter the following information:

Basic data Tab


¾ Invoice date Today's date
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Currency (behind amount) USD
¾ Purchase Order (Your Purchase Order #)

¾ (Enter)
¾ Amount Enter amount from Exercise 175
¾ Tax code XI (This should come in automatically – if not, enter it)

¾ (Enter)

¾ Use the button to see if the postings are correct.

¾ (Post)

¾ Record the Document Number: _________________________

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 226 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 178: Post Payment to Vendor


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to post payment to the vendor. The invoice is now due for payment.
You are requested to clear the invoice by posting an outgoing payment using the bank account (no.
1000_ _) of your chart of accounts.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Outgoing Payment→ Post

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
Bank data
¾ Account 100_ _ _ (Bank - Checking)
¾ Amount Enter the amount of the outgoing payment
¾ Text Invoice Number or other text
Open items selection
¾ Account Vendor # for Slick Pens

¾ Select
¾ Review the “Not assigned” balance, ensure that it equals zero.

¾ (Post)
¾ Record the Accounting Document Number: __________________________

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 227 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 22:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 22 is to look at the functionality of delivery and billing due lists. Delivery and billing
due list provide you the opportunity to create your deliveries and billings collectively, rather than one at
a time.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 228 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 179: Run Delivery Due List


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to have you run a delivery due list. In normal daily operation, creating
delivery notes for each individual sales order is the exception rather than the rule. In most companies,
the shipping department would run the delivery due list, which, creates delivery notes for any material
with deliverable items.

Items which are due for delivery are defined by the following parameters:
• Material is available and scheduled
• The date of due delivery has arrived
• Material is delivered for the chosen shipping point (determined from shipping point
determination)

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Create →
Collective Processing of Documents Due for Delivery → Sales Orders

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Shipping Point/Receiving Pt S_ _ _
¾ Deliv. Creation Date Enter dates from one week ago to 14 days from today
General data TAB:
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _

¾ (Execute)
¾ Select the desired line(s)

¾ Select In some cases, the system has combined deliveries from different orders on the
same delivery note number. This is set in the customer master, by selecting Order combination.

¾ (Save)
Record the delivery note document numbers: _____________________ ______________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 229 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 180: Pick Materials on Delivery Note


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will update the delivery documents created by entering the picked quantities into
the delivery note. When saved, the delivery has changed to a picked status.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Enter a delivery note number from the previous exercise.

¾ (Enter)
Picking TAB:
¾ Select the storage location for the individual materials.
¾ Enter the Picked quantity (it should be the same as the Delivery quantity for each material).

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)

Repeat for all outbound deliveries created in the previous exercise.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 230 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 181: Post Goods Issue


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the post goods issue which reduces unrestricted stock to reflect the
inventory has shipped. This needs to be completed for all delivery notes.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Outbound delivery number from the previous exercise.

¾ Select
The system returns a message indicating change to the delivery note.

Repeat for all outbound deliveries you processed in the previous exercise.

Record any system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 231 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 182: Run Billing Due List, Invoice Customers


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise introduces you to the concept of collective billing. The Billing due list is a collective
display of all bills due in a specified period of time. This allows you to then individually or collectively
create all the invoices.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document →
Process Billing Due List

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Billing Data
¾ Billing Date from a week ago
¾ Billing to date today’s date is defaulted as the “to” date
¾ Billing Type leave blank
¾ SD Document leave blank

Selection Tab
Organizat. Data
¾ Sales organization S_ _ _
Documents to be selected
¾ Select Order-related
¾ Select Delivery-related

¾ Click
¾
The system lists all the documents (Delivery numbers) due for invoicing

Now we complete the invoices as follows:

¾ Highlight an individual SD document number


¾ Click on

¾ (Save)
¾ Record Billing Document Number: ________________________

¾ (Back)
¾ The next delivery note should be on the Create Billing Document Screen

¾ (Execute)

¾ (Save)
¾ Record Billing Document Number: ________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 232 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 183: Post Receipt of Customer Payment


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you go through and post receipt of payment from all of our customers for all the
orders you have created to date. You post the incoming payment to the customer's account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Incoming Payments

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
¾ Company Code C___
¾ Currency/Rate USD
Bank data
¾ Account Your Bank Account
¾ Amount Enter the amount of the payment
Open item selection
¾ Account Customer Number

¾ Select
Note: The “not assigned” amount should be 0.00

¾ (Save)
¾ This process will need to be repeated for both customers for which you created invoices.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 233 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Unit 23:
Purpose of Unit
The purpose of Unit 23 is to introduce you to the return process. In this unit you will create a goods
return order, receive the goods, and complete the process by transferring them back into unrestricted
stock, issuing a credit and pay the customer for the goods they returned.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 234 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 184: Create Goods Return Order


Purpose of Exercise
In this exercise you will create a return for fifty (50) Barrel Pens due to a quantity discrepancy. The
process of creating a goods return order is no different from that of creating a standard sales order.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Order Order # from Promotion Products, Inc

¾ (Enter)
¾ Acknowledge Information pop-up window: “Consider the subsequent documents”
System Menu: Sales Document → Create subsequent order
¾ Order type RE
Organizational Data
¾ Sales Organization S_ _ _
¾ Distribution Channel WH
¾ Division 01

¾ Select

¾ Select

¾ (Deselect All)
¾ Select Material BPEN_ _ _
¾ Change Open Quantity 50

¾ Select This will return you to the Create Returns Overview Screen
Sales Tab
¾ Order reason Quantity Discrepancy
Verify
¾ Material BPEN_ _ _
¾ Quantity 50
¾ Record the Return Order Net Value $________________________

¾ (Save)
¾ Record Return Order Number __________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 235 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 185: Create Delivery Note for Return Order


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you create the goods receipt for the returned pens. The menu path for a goods
receipt of a return order is no different from that of a delivery creation for sales order. A goods receipt
is issued for blocked (inspection) stock.

Promotional Products, Inc. – Return Merchandise Authorization

RMA–1234
Reason for rejection: Quantity Discrepancy

ITEMS: BPEN_ _ _ QUANTITY: 50

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Subsequent Functions →
Outbound Delivery

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Shipping point S_ _ _
Sales order data
¾ Selection date Today + 2 days
¾ Order Returns order number from previous exercise

¾ (Enter)
¾ Check the material, customer etc.

¾ If correct (Save)
¾ Record the Returns Delivery number: __________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 236 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 186: Receive Materials from Goods Return Order


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to pick the goods and post goods issue.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Outbound Delivery Enter the delivery note number from your Return Order

¾ (Enter)
Picking Tab
¾ Enter the storage location: 10 (Inventory)

¾ Select
¾ System should respond with message indicating that the Returns Delivery has been saved.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 237 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 187: Check Document Flow


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the document flow up to this point in the return process.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following:


¾ Document Return Order Number
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow
¾ Display the GD document
A material document is displayed showing a single goods movement. We see that movement type 651 is
displayed. Since we haven’t accepted ownership yet, there are no accounting documents. Movement
type 651 moves material into a “Returns” stock type.

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 238 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 188: Review the Stock Overview


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you look at the stock overview and record the types of BPEN_ _ _ stock.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


Database selections
¾ Material BPEN_ _ _
¾ Plant P_ _ _
¾ Storage location Leave Blank

¾ (Execute)
¾ Select the plant line in the display.

¾ Select
¾ This will open a pop-up window showing the details of the inventory by stock type at the level you
selected.
¾ Check the unrestricted use quantity (Unrestricted use) stock type
¾ Check the returns quantity (Returns) stock type
¾ Check the sales orders quantity (Sales orders) stock type
¾ Check the delivery quantity (Scheduled for delivery) stock type

Record the storage location and quantity of inventory for each Stock type:
Plant BPEN_ _ _
Storage Location
Stock Type Quantity
Unrestricted Use
Returns
Sales Orders
Scheduled for Delivery

¾ (Exit) To return to SAP Easy Access Menu

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 239 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 189: Transfer Return Stock to Unrestricted Use


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to transfer the returned goods to unrestricted stock. The movement
results in a debit to the trading goods account and a credit to the COGS account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Transfer Posting

Trans Code

System Menu: Movement Type → Transfer Posting → Stock to Stock → Own from Returns

Enter the following:


Defaults for Document Items
¾ Movement type 453 is defaulted
¾ Plant P_ _ _
¾ Storage Location 10

¾ (Enter)
Items
¾ Material BPEN_ _ _
¾ Quantity 50
¾ UnE (Unit of Entry) EA

¾ (Enter)

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the material document number _____________________

¾ Display the material and accounting documents.


¾ Re-check the stock status of the material to confirm the “return” stock has been transferred to
unrestricted stock

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 240 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 190: Post Customer Credit


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you prepare to issue a credit, the Billing block must be removed from the
Return’s sales order to proceed with issuing the credit.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Order: Return sales order number

¾ (Enter)
¾ Acknowledge Information pop-up window: “Consider the subsequent documents.”
¾ Delete the entry in the field “Billing block”

¾ (Save)

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 241 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 191: Create a Billing Document


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to create the account payable to the customer for the returned goods.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Return order number

¾ (Enter)
¾ Record the total amount billed to the customer. $____________________

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the billing document number: __________________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 242 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 192: Release Billing Document to Accounting


Purpose of Exercise
The purpose of this exercise is to release the billing document to accounting. Before the billing
document can be processed, Sales must release it to Accounting. All credits are automatically blocked
for processing so that they may be reviewed prior to being released to Accounting for payment.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Billing document Billing Document number
System Menu: Billing Document → Release To Accounting

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 243 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 193: Check Document Flow


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the document flow up to this point in the return process.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following:


¾ Document Return Order Number
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow
Review the accounting document created by billing

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 244 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 194: Post Payment to the Customer – Refund


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you post a payment to your customer. Now that they have received the invoice
with the credit you will need to send them a payment. The payment will be reflected in their account.

Navigation
Menu Path
Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Document Entry → Other → Outgoing Payments

Trans Code

Enter the following information:


¾ Document Date Today’s date
¾ Company Code C_ _ _
¾ Currency/Rate USD
Bank data
¾ Account G/L account for your Bank (Checking Account)
¾ Amount Enter the amount of the payment (from sales order)
Open item selection
¾ Account Customer # for Promotional Products, Inc.

¾ Select
Note: The “not assigned” amount should be 0.00

¾ (Save)
¾ Record the document number for this posting ________________

Record the system message:


Message

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 245 The Rushmore Group, LLC
BUSINESS PROCESS INTEGRATION – I – (BPI – I)

Exercise 195: Check Document Flow


Purpose of Exercise
This exercise will have you review the document flow now that the process is complete.

Navigation
Menu Path
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change

Trans Code

Enter the following:


¾ Document Return Order Number
System Menu: Environment → Display document flow
Review the accounting document – has it been cleared.

ECC 6.0 – Release January 2008 Page 246 The Rushmore Group, LLC

Potrebbero piacerti anche